02 130205 V7.13 EVRC2A-N6,NT Manual Control
Short Description
texto referido a equipos de protección para redes de media tensión....
Description
Release Date: Feb. 2013 / Manual Revision: 7.13
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT USER’S MANUAL
ENTEC
ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright © 2002 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved.
Forerunner Distribution & Automation
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00 1.
Add explanations for new additional function below - Support ETHERNET Port(Port4) for EVRC2A - Support IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10 1.
Add explanations for new additional function below - Dialing Modem Support(add the setup menu)
[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12 1.
Add explanations for new additional function below - Support IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu) - Support Overfrequency Protection Element (add the setup menu)
[Jan. 2010] Ver5.00 After the Ver5.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N(Network type)”. 1.
Support “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” function(add the setup menu). This function is used to interface with ETIMS over Ethernet port.
2.
Separate “Communication” setting into “Protocol” and “Port” settings.
3.
Describe elements consisting of “Protection” section in order of the menu shown in LCD.
4.
Add “CLOSE Function at Normal Frequency restored” in Frequency element.
5.
Add the description related with “STATUS” menu omitted in the previous version.
6.
Add the description related with “MAINTENANCE” menu omitted in the previous version.
7.
Add “Fault Trip(option)” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.
[Jul. 2010] Ver5.10 1.
Add contents of RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider), one of Voltage Divider Inputs.
[Sep. 2010] Ver5.11 1.
Add “6.10. Set Group Change”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
i
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
[Mar. 2011] Ver5.20 1.
Add “Loss of Phase” in “PROTECTION” menu according to an additional function (option), “Loss of Phase”.
2.
Add “Supply Outage Measurement” as an additional function in menu. - Add “S-Outage” and “S-O Dura” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ EVENT RECORDER” menu. - Add “S-Outage Count” and “S-Outage Event” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu. - Add “S-OUTAGE COUNTER” in “MAINTENANCE” menu. - Add “SUPPLY OUTAGE” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.
[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00 After the Ver6.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N6(Network type)”. [Jan. 2012] Ver6.00 1.
Change the terms related with battery testing.
[Feb. 2012] Ver6.01 1.
Add “Power Quality” set-up in “SYSTEM SETUP” menu.
2.
Change “Supply Outage” to “Power Quality” in some menus. - Change “S-Outage Counter” to “Power Quality” in “MAINTENANCE” menu. - Change “Supply Outage” to “Power Quality” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu. - Change “S-Outage Count” and “S-Outage Event” to “P-Quality Count” and “P-Quality” in “RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
3.
Add “HARMONICS” in “MAIN MENU/6.METERING” menu.
[Jun. 2012] Ver6.02 Changed the manual based on EVRC2A-N6 firmware V6.12 upgrading. 1.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding measuring function of voltage/current unbalance. - Change “METERING” in “1.2. Summary of Features”. - Change “Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy” in “2.3. Metering Accuracy”. - Add “10.1.9. Unbalance”. - Change “Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy” in “10.2. Accuracy”.
2.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding detection function of voltage/current unbalance. - Change “MONITORING” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.
ii
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
- Change “RECORDER” in “1.2. Summary of Features”. - Add “Power Quality” in “2.5. Monitoring”. - Change “SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER”, “POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER”, “COUNTER” in “2.6. Recorder”. - Change “Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree” in “3.2.1. Main Menu Summary”. - Add settings for Unbalance in “6.10. Power Quality”. - Add Unbalance Counter in “11.4. Power Quality”. - Change “12.2. System Event Recorder”. - Change “12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder”. 3.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding “Daily Max I” and “Daily Energy” settings. - Change “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
4.
Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of changed range of reclose interval 1. - Change “Reclose interval 1” in “2.4. Protection Elements/ Reclose Control”. - Change “Range of Reclose 1” in “7.1. Reclose(79)”.
[Aug. 2012] Ver7.00 Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_N6 firmware V6.15 upgrading. 1.
Change “5.3. Clock”.
2.
Change “5.8. Time Set & Display Type”. - Add “Set Type”, “GMT Sign”, “GMT Hour”, “GMT Min” and “Evt Send Type” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ TIME SET & DIS TYPE” menu.
3.
Change “SEF Pickup Current Setup” in “7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)”.
4.
Change “9.3. Clock”.
5.
Change “10.1.4. Synchro Voltage”.
6.
Change “Table 14-1. Warning Events” in “14.1. Warning Events”.
[Nov. 2012] Ver7.10 1.
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.04 upgrading. - Change “5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol – Option” : Add “Time Req(m)” set-up in “COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2” menu. - Change “5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232” : Add “Parity Bit”, “Data Bit” and “Stop Bit” set-up in “COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232” menu. - Change “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC” : Add “Time Syn’ Ref” and “Evt Time Type” set-up in “COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC” menu. - Change “5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option” : Add “Time Syn’ Ref” set-up in “RELAY
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
iii
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE” menu. 2.
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.06 upgrading. - Change “5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol – Option” : Add the setting items in “COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101” menu. - Change “5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol – Option” : Add the setting items in “COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104” menu. - Change “6.3. Line VL Sensing” : Add “Install Type” set-up in “SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING” menu.
3.
Change the description for “SKIP at Fault” and “Fault ‘I’ Evt” setting in “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
4.
Add the Note in “6.4. System Power”.
[Nov. 2012] Ver7.12 1.
Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.07 upgrading : Delete “Tx Delay” set-up in “COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2” menu. - Change the description for “Tx Delay” setting in “5.2.2.1. DNP3.0 Protocol – Option”.
2.
Change the description for “TX Post Delay” and “TX Pre Delay” in “5.2.3.1. PORT2 – RS232”.
3.
Change the setting examples of “Use of VD(CVD or RVD)” in “6.2. Line VS Sensing / 6.2.3. Setting Examples”.
[Dec. 2012] Ver7.12 1.
Add the Note in “5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option”.
2.
Add the Note in “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
3.
Change “Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)” in “7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves”.
[Feb. 2013] Ver7.13 1.
Add the Notes in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
2.
Add the Note of “SEF Pickup Current Setup” in “7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)”.
3.
Add the Note of “SEF” setting in “7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”.
4.
Add the Note in “9.4. Control Type”.
iv
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1 1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.2. Summary of Features .......................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. 5 2.1. Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 5 2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 8 2.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 9 2.4. Protection Elements........................................................................................................... 11 2.5. Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 16 2.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 19 2.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 22
3. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 23 3.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 24 3.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 33 3.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 37
4. SELECT SETBANK ..................................................................................................... 40 5. RELAY SETUP .............................................................................................................. 41 5.1. Passcode ............................................................................................................................ 41 5.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 42 5.3. Clock ................................................................................................................................. 76 5.4. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 78 5.5. Clear Saved Data ............................................................................................................... 79 5.6. Factory Debug ................................................................................................................... 79 5.7. Gas Sensor Type ................................................................................................................ 80 5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option ................................................................................... 80
6. SYSTEM SETUP ........................................................................................................... 82 6.1. Current Sensing ................................................................................................................. 82 6.2. Line VS Sensing ................................................................................................................ 84 6.3. Line VL Sensing ................................................................................................................ 86
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
v
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.4. System Power .................................................................................................................... 88 6.5. Panel Sleep Time ............................................................................................................... 91 6.6. Opto Input Set - Option ..................................................................................................... 91 6.7. Output Relay Set - Option ................................................................................................. 93 6.8. Loop Control - Option ....................................................................................................... 96 6.9. Set Group Change - Option ............................................................................................. 115 6.10. Power Quality - Option ................................................................................................. 116
7. PROTECTION ............................................................................................................ 120 7.1. Reclose (79)..................................................................................................................... 122 7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) .................................................................. 128 7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) ................................................................ 132 7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) ............................................................................................. 136 7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) .......................................................... 138 7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)..................................................................................... 142 7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) ................................................................................. 144 7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) ........................................................... 146 7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) .............................................................................. 148 7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) ........................................................................ 150 7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) ............................................................ 152 7.12. Cold Load Pickup .......................................................................................................... 154 7.13. Directional Controls (67)............................................................................................... 162 7.14. Undervoltage (27).......................................................................................................... 170 7.15. Overvoltage (59)............................................................................................................ 172 7.16. Frequency(81) ............................................................................................................... 174 7.17. Other Element................................................................................................................ 177 7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves .............................................................................................. 180 7.19. Loss of Phase - Option .................................................................................................. 207
8. MONITORING ........................................................................................................... 208 8.1. Demand ........................................................................................................................... 208 8.2. Synchronism Check (25) ................................................................................................. 211 8.3. Trip Counter .................................................................................................................... 213 8.4. Recloser Wear .................................................................................................................. 215 8.5. Battery Test...................................................................................................................... 217 8.6. Fault Locator ................................................................................................................... 218 8.7. Gas Low Lock – Option .................................................................................................. 220
vi
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.8. EXT’ Trip & Lock – Option ............................................................................................ 220 8.9. Live Load Block – Option ............................................................................................... 221
9. STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 222 9.1. OPTO Inputs ................................................................................................................... 222 9.2. Relay Outputs .................................................................................................................. 222 9.3. Clock ............................................................................................................................... 223 9.4. Control Type .................................................................................................................... 224
10. METERING ............................................................................................................... 225 10.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 226 10.2. Accuracy ........................................................................................................................ 235
11. MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 237 11.1. Counters......................................................................................................................... 237 11.2. Wear Monitor................................................................................................................. 237 11.3. Output Relay Test .......................................................................................................... 238 11.4. Power Quality - Option ................................................................................................. 239
12. EVENT RECORDER................................................................................................ 241 12.1. Waveform Capture ........................................................................................................ 241 12.2. System Event Recorder ................................................................................................. 245 12.3. Load Profile ................................................................................................................... 247 12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder............................................................................................ 250 12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Option............................................................................... 252 12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder - Option ....................................................................... 254
13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 257 13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 257 13.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 258 13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 259 13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 261 13.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 262 13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 263 13.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 264 13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 265 13.9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram – VD Type .......................................................................... 266 13.10. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type ......................................................................... 267 13.11. Side Panel .................................................................................................................... 268
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
vii
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 269 13.13. VD Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................... 270 13.14. VT Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................................... 271 13.15. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 272 13.16. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 273 13.17. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling................................................................ 275 13.18. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 275 13.19. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 276 13.20. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 276 13.21. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 277 13.22. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 278 13.23. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 278 13.24. Battery Protection ........................................................................................................ 278 13.25. Communications .......................................................................................................... 279 13.26. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 281 13.27. Hardware Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 282 13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 283 13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 284 13.30. Main Board .................................................................................................................. 285 13.31. Analog Board............................................................................................................... 286 13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 287 13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 288 13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 289 13.35. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ................................................................................... 289 13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 290 13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 292 13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil....................................................................................... 292 13.39. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 293
14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 294 14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 294 14.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 296
viii
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1. INTRODUCTION 1.1. Description y
EVRC2A with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best quality of electric service.
y
Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option) which fundamentally installed.
y
In order to perform the protection function, line voltage and current signal filtered with analog filter and digital DFT full-cosin filter is used.
y
EVRC2A provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote. It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.
y
Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering is also performed.
y
Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control EVRC2A with key buttons on the user interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Program 1, Program 2, Hot line tag.
y
Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.
y
EVRC2A contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3, McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
1.2. Summary of Features PROTECTION y
Phase Instantaneous Over-current Element
y
Phase Time Over-current Elements
y
Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y
Ground Instantaneous Over-current Element
y
Ground Time Over-current Elements
y
Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y
Sensitive Earth Fault Elements
y
Negative Instantaneous Over-current Element
y
Negative Time Over-current Elements
y
Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y
Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Sequence Directional Control
y
Automatic Reclosing(Up To 4 Shots)
y
Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control
y
Sequence Coordination Control
y
Two Under-voltage Elements
y
Two Over-voltage Elements
y
Under-frequency Element
y
Over-frequency Element
y
Loop Control - Option
y
Loss of Phase - Option
METERING
2
y
Phase, Ground and Sensitive Ground Current and Phasors
y
Line and Phase Voltage and Phasors(Source Side and Load Side)
y
Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component Phasors
y
Frequency Magnitude and Rate
y
Synchronizing Voltage, Phasor and Frequency
y
Synchronizing Delta㎸, Delta ㎐ and Delta Leg
y
Single and Three Phase Power(MW, Mvar, MVA, PF)
y
Energy(MWh, Mvarh)
y
Maximum Demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, MW, Mvar, MVA)
y
Voltage and current harmonics - Option
y
Voltage and current unbalance - Option ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
MONITORING y
Fault Locator
y
Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2)
y
Trip Counter Limit
y
Synchronism Check
y
Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase)
y
Recloser Operation Failure
y
Voltage Transformer Failure
y
Battery Automatic Load Test
y
Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
y
Power Quality - Option
y
Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure - Option NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
COMMUNICATIONS y
Front Panel PORT1 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software
y
Side panel PORT2 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software , DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option
y
Side panel PORT3 RS485 or R232* Serial Port : DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol – Option
y
Side panel PORT4 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol and EVRC2A interface software – Option NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of EVRC2A-N6,NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6,NT, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
3
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
RECORDER y
Trip and fault counter
y
Supply outage counter and time – Option
y
Sag/Swell detection counter – Option
y
Voltage and current unbalance detection counter - Option
y
System event recorder - last 2048 events
y
Diagnostic event recorder - last 512 events
y
Load profile recorder - last 213days
y
Fault Waveform - 15 cycles × 32 events
y
Fault trip event recorder - last 512 events - Option
y
Power Quality event recorder - last 512 events - Option
USER INTERFACE y
Fault indicators
y
Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
y
Dual Functional keypads
y
20×4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
y
32 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc
y
RS232 port
y
Context Help Messages
y
Access Security(Passcode)
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS - Option y
7 Programmable Relays
y
1 Programmable Alarm Relay
AUXILIARY INPUTS - Option y
4
8 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1. Inputs and Outputs Systems y
3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum
Frequency y
50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
Control Voltage Input y
AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%)
y
Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
y
Based on user requirement, prepare 110V/220V Selectable Switch - Option
User available DC power Output - Option y
DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc
y
DC Power Continuous : 40W
y
DC Power for 60Sec : 60W
Voltage Divider Inputs (VD) - Standard Capacitor Voltage Divider Inputs (CVD) – Only EVR y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V y Burden : 2e-6 VA y System Voltage : 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ y Capacitor value - Phase Capacitor value : 20㎊ Resistance Voltage Divider Inputs (RVD) – Only EPR y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V y Burden : Bow 0.0015 VA y System Voltage : 15㎸, 27㎸ y Resistance value - Phase Resistance value : 100MΩ
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
5
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option y
Voltage Inputs EVRC2A-N : 4 Channel(VA, VB, VC and VL) EVRC2A-N6,NT : 6 Channel - Source Voltage 1 VA,VB,VC - Source Voltage 2 VR,VS,VT
y
Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous 1.RELAY SETUP 2.SYSTEM SETUP 3.PROTECTION 4.MONITORRING 5.SAVE SETTING
[SENSTV CURRENT] 0 A 0.0 Lag
[PHASE C CURRENT] 0 A 0.0 Lag [GROUND CURRENT] 0 A 0.0 Lag
[PHASE 0 [PHASE 0
[STATUS] >1.OPTO INPUTS 2.RELAY OUTPUTS 3.CLOCK 4.CONTROL TYPE
A CURRENT] A 0.0 Lag B CURRENT] A 0.0 Lag
RECLOSER CONTROL EVERC2A-N6 LOOP CONTROL ENTEC E&E CO. V6.05
[METERING] >1.CURRENT 2.S-VOLTAGE 3.FREQUENCY 4.SYNCHRO VOLTAGE 5.POWER 6.ENERGY 7.DEMAND 8.SYSTEM 9.L-VOLTAGE 10.UNBALANCE 11.HARMONICS
EVRC2A - CURRENT (A) A: 0 B: 0 C: 0 G: 0 SG: 0 I2: 0
EVR2A-SYSTEM STATUS CONTROL : NOPANEL BREAKER : OPEN BAT:24.00 GAS:NOGAS
[MAIN MENU] >1.SELECT SETBANK 2.PRIMARY SETTING 3.ALTERNATE SETTING 4.EDITBANK SETTING 5.STATUS 6.METERING 7.MAINTENANCE 8.EVENT RECORDER
[MAINTENANCE] >1.COUNTERS 2.WEAR MONITOR 3.OUTPUT RELAY TEST 4.POWER QUALITY
[RELAY SETUP] >1.PASSCODE 2.COMMUNICATION 3.CLOCK 4.EVENT RECORDER 5.CLEAR SAVED DATA 6.FACTORY DEBUG 7.GAS SENSOR TYPE 8.TIME SET&DIS TYPE
[SYSTEM SETUP] >1.CURRENT SENSING 2.LINE VS SENSING 3.LINE VL SENSING 4.SYSTEM POWER 5.PANEL SLEEP TIME 6.OPTO INPUT SET 7.OUTPUT RELAY SET 8.LOOP CONTROL 9.SET GROUP CHANGE 10.POWER QUALITY
[PROTECTION] >1.OPERATION 2.INTERVALS 3.PICKUP CURRENT 4.PHASE FAST 5.PHASE DELAY 6.GROUND FAST 7.GROUND DELAY 8.SEF ELEMENT 9.NEG SEQ FAST 10.NEG SEQ DELAY 11.H/C TRIP-PHA 12.H/C TRIP-GND 13.H/C TRIP-NEQ 14.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA 15.H/C LOCKOUT-GND 16.H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ 17.CLOD LOAD PICKUP 18.DIRECTION 19.VOLTAGE 20.FREQUENCY 21.OTHER ELEMENT 22.USER CURVE SET 23.LOSS OF PHASE
[MONITORING] >1.DEMAND 2.SYNCHROCHECK 3.TRIP COUNTER 4.RECLOSER WEAR 5.BATTERY TEST 6.FAULT LOCATOR 7.GAS LOW LOCK 8.EXT TRIP&LOCK 9.LIVE LOAD BLOCK
[EVENT RECORDER] >1.FAULT CYCLE 2.SYSTEM STATUS 3.LOAD PROFILE 4.DIAGNOSTIC 5.FAULT TRIP 6.POWER QUALITY
Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree
36
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
[COMMUNICATION] >1.PROTOCOL SETUP 2.PORT SETUP 3.DIALUP MODEM-1 4.DIALUP MODEM-2 5.EVENT&ETC
[CLEAR SAVED DATA] >1.Fault Cycle 2.System Status 3.Load Profile 4.Daignostic 5.Max Demand 6.Energy 7.Counter 8.Wear Monitor 9.Fault Trip 10.P-Quality Count 11.P-Quality Event Event 12.Comm 13.ALL Saved data [DIRECTION ELEMENT] >1.PHASE DIRECTION 2.GROUND DIRECTION 3.SEF DIRECTION 4.NEQ DIRECTION [VOLTAGE] >1.UNDER VOLTAGE 1 2.UNDER VOLTAGE 2 3.OVER VOLTAGE 1 4.OVER VOLTAGE 2 [USER >1.USER 2.USER 3.USER 4.USER
CURVE CURVE CURVE CURVE CURVE
SET] 1 2 3 4
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3.3. Using the LCD Menu Starting mode Screen appears after powering on Control and initializing System. INITING LOGO EVRC2A-SYSTEM STATUS CONTROL : NORMAL BREAKER : CLOSE BAT:27.49 GAS: NOGAS
Starting mode Message Display. Control : Control Status displays Breaker : Breaker Status displays Battery : Battery Voltage displays Gas : Gas Status displays
On Starting mode screen, to see Main Menu, press [FUN] key. Use [▲] [▼] key to select submenu. When cursor is in top menu, if you press [▲] key, you go to the bottom menu due to Rotation Menu Algorithm. MAIN MENU [MAIN MENU] >1.SELECT SETBANK >2.PRIMARY SETTING >3.ALTERNATE SETTING >4.EDITBANK SETTING >5.STATUS >6.METERING >7.MAINTENANCE >8.EVENT RECORDER
Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus. You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key. Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
3.3.1. View Example To see External input port status. Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS”. The following screen is displayed. STATUS / OPTO INPUTS [OPTO INPUTS] >Input 1: OPEN >Input 2: CLOSE >Input 3: OPEN >Input 4: OPEN >Input 5: OPEN >Input 6: OPEN >Input 7: OPEN >Input 8: CLOSE >Door st: CLOSE
OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted, CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted. Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [▲] [▼] key to see next lines.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
37
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3.3.2. Setting Example Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting. 1) Move to “PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE”. A following screen is displayed. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE [PICKUP CURRENT A] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 S.E.F: OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements.
2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into value column. 3) Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value. Press [ENT] key and then you can see the changed Phase value. NOTE: You must save all changed values at Setting Save menu.
3.3.3. Help Function Help function displays the detail requirements for the setting. User can check the detail requirements of a setting after selecting the setting item by pressing [FUN] key. Help Message Pick up current - ph >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 S.E.F: OFF
38
Help Message : Pickup current - phase (OFF,10~1600A)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3.3.4. Setting Save To save all changed values, steps are as follows; Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS” and follow each step as below. PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS ① 1) Type Passcode and press [ENT] key ENTER PASSCODE 0000
2) If Passcode is correct, screen ②(Left) appears; otherwise screen ① (Left) appears again.
② SETTING VALUE SAVE :SETTING SAVE
③
3) If screen ② appears, press [ENT] key to save changed value. NOTE : The changed setting can be effective after it is saved.
SAVE SETTING
If the “save” procedure is canceled, the setting keeps previous value. However, by EVRC2A version 5.30, if a setting related with communication is changed and then saved, the changed setting is applied after rebooting.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
39
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
4. SELECT SETBANK There were only Primary and Alternative banks before version 4.40 and 4 more banks added since version 4.40. EVRC2A has 6 setting banks and the user can have 6 different sets depending on Distribution circumstance. SELECT SETBANK / PRIMARY [SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 >Edit: BANK3
Range
BANK1 ~ 6
Default BANK1
Step
~
Step
~
Step
~
Set Primary for BANK1.
SELECT SETBANK / ALTERNATE [SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 >Edit: BANK3
Range
BANK1 ~ 6
Default BANK2 Set Alternate for BANK2.
SELECT SETBANK / EDIT [SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 >Edit: BANK3
Range
BANK1 ~ 6
Default BANK3 Set Edit for BANK3.
40
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5. RELAY SETUP Relay set shall be set independently for each bank. However, from version 4.41, regardless of bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank. Sets following items for Relay y
Passcode
y
Communication
y
Clock
y
Event Recorder
y
Clear Saved Data
y
Factory Debug
y
Gas Sensor Type
y
Time SET&DIS Type NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no “Gas Sensor Type”.
5.1. Passcode PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / PASSCODE ① [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER PASSCODE 0000
② [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER NEW PASSCODE 0000
③ [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER NEW PASSCODE 0000 PRESS TO SAVE
y Press PASSCODE to store changed value. y PASSCODE has 4 digits. y Passcode change procedure is as follows; ① Enter the old PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key. ② Enter new PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key. ③ To change and store PASSCODE, enter, [ENT] key. ④ After changing PASSCODE, new PASSCODE will be displayed.
④ [PASSCODE CHANGE] ENTER NEW PASSCODE 0000 PASSCODE SAVED: 0000
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
41
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2. Communication 5.2.1. Overview EVRC2A has four ports for communication. The EVRC2A has the front panel RS232 port, the side panel RS232 port, the side panel RS485 port(or RS232 port) and the side panel Ethernet port. Communication port settings are available as follows in “Table 5-1. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A”. Table 5-1. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A Port
Speed
Parity bit
Data bit
Stop bit
PORT1 RS-232
57600 bps
No parity
8
1
User Interface Front Panel
PORT2 RS-232
1200 - 19200 bps
No parity
8
1
User Interface Side Panel
1200 - 19200 bps
No parity
8
1
User Interface Side Panel
PORT3
Type
RS-485 or RS-232
PORT4 RJ45
10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Location
User Interface Side Panel
PORT1(RS232) A port to interface with Interface Software. PORT2(RS232) – Option The Port2 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port2 for the selected protocol by changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port2. PORT3(RS485 or RS232) – Option The Port3 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port3 for the selected protocol by changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port3. The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of EVRC2A can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
42
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PORT4(RJ-45) – Option The Port4 is a Ethernet port for TCP/IP communication (10 BASE-T /100 BASE-T speed) for Modbus, IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 Protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port4 for the selected protocol by changing its settings. NOTE: From EVRC2A version 5.30, if a setting related with communication is changed and then saved, the changed setting is applied after rebooting. During IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 communication through Port2, Port3 or Port 4, a user can connect with the Interface Software “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” and use it. Please refer to “DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual”, “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual” or “IEC60870-5-101/-104 Protocol Technical Manual” for more information about setting for each protocol.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
43
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2.2. Protocol Setup 5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol - Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the DNP 3.0 through communication port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual” Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2” to select setting for DNP 3.0 Protocol. COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Function [DNP3.0-1] >Function: ENABLE Use Port: P2-232 Master Addr’: 60000
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use DNP3.0 Protocol or not.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Use Port [DNP3.0-1] >Function: ENABLE >Use Port: P2-232 >Master Addr’: 60000
P2-232, P3-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
Range Default
DNP1 : P2-232 DNP2 : P3-232
Step
~
Select DNP3 communication port.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master Address [DNP3.0-1] >Master Addr’: 60000 >Slave Addr’: 1 >D/L Confirm: SOME
0 ~ 65519
Range
Default 60000
Step
1
Enter the master station address.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Slave Address [DNP3.0-1] >Master Addr’: 60000 >Slave Addr’: 1 >D/L Confirm: SOME
0 ~ 65519
Range Default
DNP1 : 1 DNP2 : 2
Step
Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address.
44
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Confirm [DNP3.0-1] >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L Retries: 2 >D/L Timeout: 55
NO, YES, SOME
Range
Default SOME
Step
~
Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not. NO : Data Link Confirm is not used. YES : Data Link Confirm is used. SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame. When Data Link Confirm use-setting, it shall be set as Host setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be failed due to Data Link Reset.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Retries [DNP3.0-1] >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L Retries: 2 >D/L Timeout: 55
0 ~ 255
Range
Default 2
Step
1
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link layer.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Timeout [DNP3.0-1] >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L Retries: 2 >D/L Timeout: 55
1 ~ 255 sec
Range
Default 55
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm receiving and Data Link retry is available, EVRC2A will send Data Link Frame again.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Retries [DNP3.0-1] >D/L Retries: >D/L Timeout: >A/L Retries:
0~ 255
Range 2 55 1
Default 1
Step
1
Select the number of retries that will be issued for a given application link layer.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
45
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Timeout [DNP3.0-1] D/L Timeout: A/L Retries: >A/L Timeout:
Range 55 1 55
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 55
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / SBO Time [DNP3.0-1] A/L Retries: A/L Timeout: >SBO Time:
Range 1 55 15
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 15 sec
Step
1 sec
Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Multi Inter [DNP3.0-1] >A/L Timeout: 55 >SBO Time: 15 >Multi Inter: 0.10
Range
0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Default 0.10
Step
0.01 sec
Enter a time delay between frames when Multi-frame replies.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Tx Delay [DNP3.0] >DNP Address: >Multi Inter: >Tx Delay :
Range 1 0.10 0.05
0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
Default 0.05
Step
0.01 sec
Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on. NOTE : The setting does not apply to communication and is not indicated from Ver 7.07 of EVRC2A_NT.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / PowUp Unsol [DNP3.0-1] >Multi Inter: 0.10 >Tx Delay : 0.05 >PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default ENABLE
Step
~
Select the unsolicited mode. Enable : Unsolicited response is transmitted. Disable : Unsolicited response is not transmitted.
46
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Time [DNP3.0-1] >Multi Inter: 0.10 >PowUpUnsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5
Range
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 5
Step
1 sec
Set a delay time of transmission of event data after the last event occurs.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Type [DNP3.0-1] >PowUpUnsol: ENABLE >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Range
NOTRIG, PERIOD
Default NOTRIG
Step
~
Set a type to configure a method to send event data. NOTRIG : If there is no more event occurrence during setting “Unsol Time” after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted. PERIOD : Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event data occurring after setting “Unsol Time” starting and elapsing when the first event occurs.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 1 [DNP3.0-1] >Class 1: DISABLE Class 2: DISABLE >Class 3: DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 1 events.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 2 [DNP3.0-1] >Class 1: DISABLE >Class 2: DISABLE >Class 3: DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 2 events.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 3 [DNP3.0-1] Class 1: DISABLE Class 2: DISABLE >Class 3: DISABLE
Range
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 3 events.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
47
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master IP Oct 1~4 [DNP3.0-1] >Master IP Oct1: 192 >Master IP Oct2: 168 >Master IP Oct3: 7 >Master IP Oct4: 2
Range
0 ~ 255
Default ~
Step
1
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx ①
②
③
④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP/UDP Select [DNP3.0-1] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 >UDP Port: 20000
Range
TCP, UDP
Default TCP
Step
~
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP Port [DNP3.0-1] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 >UDP Port: 20000
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 20000
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / UDP Port [DNP3.0-1] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 20000 >UDP Port: 20000
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 20000
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Keep Alive Check Time [DNP3 SLAVE1] >UDP Port: 20000 >K-Alv Check Tm: 10 >Fragment Size: 2048
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
Default 10
Step
1sec
Set the Time period that checks the communication connecting status during the idle status.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Fragment Size [DNP3 SLAVE1] >UDP Port: 20000 >K-Alv Check Tm: 10 >Fragment Size: 2048
48
Range
64 ~ 2048
Default 2048
Step
Set the size of DNP3.0 fragment.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Time Req(m) [DNP3 SLAVE1] >K-Alv Check Tm: 10 >Fragment Size: 2048 >Time Req(m): 1440
0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
Range
Default 1440
Step
1 min
Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time received from master station. NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through communication port2 or port3. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC608705-101 Protocol. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function DISABLE, ENABLE
Range [IEC60870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P2-232 >Link Addr: 1
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use IEC60870-5-101 protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Use Port [IEC60870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE >Use Port P2-232 >Link Addr: 1
P2-232, P3-232, P3-485
Range
Default P2-232
Step
~
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address [IEC60870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P2-232 >Link Addr: 1
0 ~ 65535
Range
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address for IEC60870-5-101 communication.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
49
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr [IEC60870-5-101] >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 >Event Period: 15
Range
0~65535
Default 1
Step
1
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period [IEC60870-5-101] >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 >Event Period: 15
Range
1~60000 sec
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Select the Cyclic Period. It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period [IEC60870-5-101] >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60 >Event Period: 15
Range
0~255 sec
Default 15
Step
1sec
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Retries [IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10 >Max Poll Time: 10
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 0
Step
1
Set the Data retires number.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout [IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 >Conf.Timeout: 10 >Max Poll Time: 10
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 15
Step
1 sec
Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transferring the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and Data retries is available, EVRC2A transfers the Data again.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim [IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 >Conf.Timeout: 10 >Max Poll Time: 10
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 60
Step
Set the Data Polling period time.
50
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1 sec
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size* [IEC60870-5-101] >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS >ADSU Addr Size: 2
Range
1~2
Default 2
Step
1
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm* [IEC60870-5-101] >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS >Link Addr Size: 1
Range
NEVER, ALWAYS
Default ALWAYS
Step
~
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size* [IEC60870-5-101] >Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 >Link Addr Size: 1
Range
1~2
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the size of link address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-101] >Link Addr Size: 1 >Rx Frame Size: 261 >Rx Frame TO : 15
Range
0 ~ 261
Default 261
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO* [IEC60870-5-101] >Rx Frame Size: 261 >Rx Frame TO : 15 >Tx Frame Size: 261
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 255 sec
Default 15
Step
1 sec
Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after receiving the frame sync.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-101] >Tx Frame Size: 261 >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2
Range
0 ~ 261
Default 261
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
51
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size* [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 >One Ch Response: NO
Range
1~2
Default 1
Step
1
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size* [IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 >One Ch Response: NO
Range
1~3
Default 2
Step
1
Enter the size of information object address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response* [IEC60870-5-101] >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 >Select Timeout: 5
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
~
This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length NACK when no response data available.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet’ TO* [IEC60870-5-101] >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 >Select Timeout: 5
Range
0(OFF), 1~255sec
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application layer timeout).
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout* [IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES
Range
0(OFF), 1~255
Default 5
Step
1
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.
52
~
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt* [IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.06 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol - Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through communication port4. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC608705-104 Protocol. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function Range [IEC60870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use IEC60870-5-104 protocol or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr [IEC60870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60
Range
0~65535
Default 1
Step
1
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
53
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period [IEC60870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE >ASDU Addr: 1 >Cyclic Period: 60
1~60000 sec
Range
Default 60
Step
1 sec
Select the Cyclic Period. It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0) [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t0): 120 >Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10
1~255 sec
Range
Default 120
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t1) [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t0): 120 >Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10
1~255 sec
Range
Default 15
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t2) [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t0): 120 >Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10
1~255 sec
Range
Default 10
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message ( t2Time Out(t1): 15 >Time Out(t2): 10 >Time Out(t3): 20
Range
1~255 sec
Default 20
Step
1sec
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t2): 10 >Time Out(t3): 20 >Event Period: 5
Range
0~255 sec
Default 5
Step
1
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
54
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port Range [IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t3): 20 >Event Period: 5 >TCP Port: 2404
0 ~ 65535
Default 2404
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP Port of EVRC2A for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 >Select Timeout: 5
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 255
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size* [IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 >Select Timeout: 5
Range
0 ~ 255
Default 255
Step
1
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout* [IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES
Range
0(OFF), 1~255
Default 5
Step
1
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination* [IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
55
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt* [IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
Range
NO, YES
Default YES
Step
~
Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.06 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.4. MODBUS Protocol - Option EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual” Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol. COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function Range [MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE Use Port: P3-485 >Slave Addr: 1
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Use Port [MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P3-485 >Slave Address: 1
Range
P2-232, P3-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
Default P4-TCP
Step
~
Select MODBUS communication port.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address [MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE >Use Port: P3-485 >Slave Address: 1
Range
1 ~ 254
Default 1
Step
Enter the Modbus address.
56
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Tx Delay [MODBUS] >Slave Address: 1 >Tx Delay: 0.005 >TCP/UDP Select: TCP
Range
0.000 ~ 0.500 sec
Default 0.005
Step
0.001 sec
Delay time of sending Real data from RTS Signal is on.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select [MODBUS] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 502
Range
TCP, UDP
Default TCP
Step
~
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP Port [MODBUS] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 502
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 502
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ UDP Port [MODBUS] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 502
Range
0 ~ 65535
Default 502
Step
1
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
57
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2.3. Port Setup 5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232 EVRC2A side panel PORT2 and related elements are set. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232” to select setting for PORT2. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Line Speed [PORT1-RS232] >Line Speed: 19200 >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8
Range
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
Default 19200
Step
~
Select the baud rate for PORT2.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Parity Bit* [PORT1-RS232] >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1
Range
NONE, ODD, EVEN
Default NONE
Step
~
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Data Bit* [PORT1-RS232] >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1
Range
7, 8
Default 8
Step
~
Select the Data Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Stop Bit* [PORT1-RS232] >Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1
Range
1, 2
Default 1
Step
~
Select the Stop Bit.
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
58
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ Line Type [PORT1-RS232] >Stop Bit: 1 >Line Type: 4-WIRE >CTS Function: ON
Range
DIALUP, 2-WIRE, 4-WIRE
Default 4-WIRE
Step
~
Select a modem for communication. DIALUP : Dial-Up modem1 is used. 2-WIRE : 2-wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect). 4-WIRE : 4-wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Function [PORT1-RS232] >Line Speed: 19200 >Line Type: 4-WIRE >CTS Function: ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
Select whether to use CTS signal or not. OFF : Regardless of CTS signal, transfer a data. ON : After confirming CTS signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Function [PORT1-RS232] >CTS Function: ON >DCD Function: OFF >RTS Function: AUTO
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Set whether to use DCD signal or not. OFF : Regardless of DCD signal, transfer a data. ON : After confirming DCD signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ RTS Function [PORT1-RS232] >CTS Function: ON >DCD Function: OFF >RTS Function: AUTO
Range
OFF, ON, AUTO
Default AUTO
Step
~
Set whether to use RTS signal and the mode or not. OFF : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always OFF(Deassert). ON : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always ON(Assert). AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of EVRC2A is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of EVRC2A is off.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
59
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Chk Out [PORT1-RS232] >CTS Chk Out: 5 >DCD Timeout: 5000 >TX Post Dly: 50
Range
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 5
Step
1 sec
Set a waiting time that waits CTS signal after RTS signal is ON. In case of radio communication system, when transfer data at the same time from various Slave, it produces transmission permission delay time due to the wireless network traffic congestion. By this setting, try the transmission with high RTS during checkout time. It is available if ‘CTS Function’ setting is ON.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Timeout [PORT1-RS232] >CTS Chk Out: 5 >DCD Timeout: 5000 >TX Post Dly: 50
Range
0 ~ 60000 msec
Default 5000
Step
1 msec
Set a delay time for checking DCD signal which determines modem status before sending RTS signal in 2-wire communication type. If DCD signal is ON, EVRC2A does not transfer the data and treat it as DCD Fail after the set time. It is available if ‘DCD Function’ setting is ON.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Post Delay [PROT1-RS232] >CTS CheckOut: 5 >DCD Timeout: 5000 >TX Post Dly: 50
Range
0 ~ 60000 msec
Default 50
Step
1 msec
Set the delay time of RTS OFF after data transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Pre Delay [PORT1-RS232] >DCD Timeout: 5000 >TX Post Dly: 50 >TX Pre Dly: 50
Range
0 ~ 60000 msec
Default 5
Step
1 msec
Set the delay time of starting transmission after CTS signal is received.
60
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2.3.2. PORT3-RS232/485 EVRC2A side panel PORT3 and related elements are set. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ POR3-232/485” to select setting for PORT3. The setting item of this menu is same as “PORT2-RS232”. Refer to “5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232”.
5.2.3.3. PORT4-TCP/IP EVRC2A side panel PORT4 and related elements are set. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ POR4-TCP/IP” to select setting for PORT4. COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / IP Addr’1 ~ 4 [PORT4-TCP/IP] >IP Addr’1: IP Addr’2: IP Addr’3: >IP Addr’4:
Range
0 ~ 255
Default ~
0 0 0 0
Step
1
Select the IP Address for EVRC2A. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx ①
②
③
④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / Gateway Addr’1 ~ 4 [PORT4-TCP/IP] >Gateway Addr’1: Gateway Addr’2: Gateway Addr’3: >Gateway Addr’4:
Range 0 0 0 0
0 ~ 255
Default ~
Step
1
Select the Gateway Address. Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx ①
②
③
④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / SubnetMask [PORT4-TCP/IP] >Gateway Oct3: 0 >Gateway Oct4: 0 >S/M:255.255.255.000
Range
255.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
Default 255.255.255.000
Step
1
Select the Subnet Mask Address for EVRC2A.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
61
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP /K- Alv’ Function Range [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2
DISABLE, ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select whether to use the Ethernet communication connecting status check function or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Idle T Range [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 4
Step
1sec
If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the communication connecting maintainance status.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Interval Range [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE >K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 >K-Alv’ Interval: 2
1 ~ 255 sec
Default 2
Step
1sec
After checking the communication connecting status, check the status again if there isn’t any reply during the setting time.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Retry Range [PORT4-TCP/IP] >K-Alv’ Idle T: >K-Alv’ Interval: >K-Alv’ Retry:
4 2 1
1 ~ 255
Default 1
Step
1
Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail and close the communication connection.
62
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2.4. RTU Communication Setup (DIALUP MODEM) - Option EVRC2A can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through Port2 and Port3 when their port types are both RS232. The configuration of the Port2 for use of dial-up modem can be set on the menu “DIALUP MODEM-1”. For the configuration of the Port3, it can be set on the menu “DIALUP MODEM2”. Refer to “5.2.4.4. Dialup Modem Setup” for more information about the configuration of Port2 and Port3 for the dial-up modem communication.
5.2.4.1. Configure modem with AT commands Before using Modem connected with EVRC2A, following setting shall be confirmed. Configure port speed(must be done) Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between EVRC2A and Modem, and set DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems. Configure answer mode(frequently) The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2. Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done) Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem. The AT command is AT&C1. Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done) Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any existing call. The AT command is AT&D2. Configure Data Set Ready(must be done) Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON. The AT command is AT&S0.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
63
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done) A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:
CONNECT 9600 The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages. The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command. Configure no echo of commands(must be done) Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing. The AT command is ATE0. Configure silent connection(must be done) Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents a human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering modems. The AT command is ATM1.
5.2.4.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem Transmitting a Communication Packet y
Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
y
The Communication packet is transmitted
※. Dial when DCD is Deassert
Receiving a Communication Packet y
Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
y
The Communication packet is received
※. if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.
Dialing y
The user should insert an order for Reset.
y
Wait 0.5 second
y
Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.
y
Checks DCD is Asserted
※. Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.
64
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Hang up y
DTR Line is deasserted
y
Wait 2 second
y
DTR Line is asserted
y
Wait 2 second
※. EVRC2A will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or transmitted.
5.2.4.3. Short Message Service (SMS) Support - Option SMS function is provided for communication based on the dialing modem to send messages of significant events occurrences to the phones or other communication devices whose phone numbers are assigned to EVRC2A for SMS function by the Interface Software. Maximum 5 phone numbers are able to be assigned for receiving SMS and maximum 6 events on a signal message per one phone number can be sent at a time. The total maximum events for each a phone number are 48 events. Following information are included in a single message for SMS. Device Name: This is the device name sending a short message. Point index Description: This point index description to indicate which event occurs is described with maximum 5 characters and it is the same with the point index used for DNP. In order to figure out what this description means, see the DNP point table. Point Index Value: This indicates the current status value of the point where an event occurs. ※ The current SMS function supports to send a message only for Binary Input event.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
65
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2.4.4. Dialup Modem Setup Calling String In order to set “Calling String”, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CALLING STRING”. COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING STRING Select a proper dial string in accordance with communication
① [CALLING STRING] ATDT
circumstance (Master or Switchboard dial method). ATD : Default Dial ATDT : Tone Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type) ATDP : Pulse Dial
② [NEW CALLING STRING] ATDT
At ①, Insert “Calling String” which a user wants.
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
1) In order to change each alphabet(A~Z, space), use [▲], [▼] button,
③ [NEW CALLING STRING] ATDT !!! SAVE OK !!!
use [◀], [▶] button to move cursor. 2) Push the [ENT] button after “Calling String” is changed, then ② is shown.
④ [NEW CALLING STRING] ATDT
If [ENT] button is pushed at ②, then “Calling String” is changed. Change of setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting is not applied yet. NOTE: The changed setting is effective after it is saved at “*.SAVE SETTING” menu.
66
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Calling Number In order to set “Calling Number”, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CALLING NUMBER” menu. COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING NUMBER Insert [Modem(Master station) phone number] for calling.
① [CALLING NUMBER]
Total 16 numbers can be inputted. If numbers under 16 are inputted, the
0000000000000000
rest should be inputted with “X”. Insert “Calling Number” which a user wants at ①.
② [NEW CALLING NUMBER] 0000000000000000 PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
1) Use [▲], [▼] button to change each number(0~9, X) and use [◀], [▶] button to move a cursor. 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.
③ [NEW CALLING NUMBER] 0000000000000XXX !!! SAVE OK !!!
“Calling Number” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
④ [NEW CALLING NUMBER] 0000000000000XXX
If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting is not applied yet.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at “*.SAVE SETTING” menu.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
67
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Initial String In order to set “Initial String”, “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2/ INITIAL STRING” menu. COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / INITIAL STRING Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
① [INITIAL STRING] ATQ1E0M1&C1&D2S0=1 < >
character, space or special character. EVRC2A should be reset before making a phone call(connection). ※ Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.
② [NEW INITIAL STRING] AT+FCLASS=0 PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
Insert “Initial String” which a user wants on ①. 1) Use [▲], [▼] button to change each number, alphabet, space or special character and use [◀], [▶] button to move a cursor. 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.
③ [NEW INITIAL STRING] AT+FCLASS=0 !!! SAVE OK !!!
NOTE : continuous double spaces or the character next to “\” is ignored.
④ [NEW INITIAL STRING] AT+FCLASS=0
“Initial String” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting is not applied yet.
NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at “*.SAVE SETTING” menu.
68
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Connect Parameter Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CONNECT PARAM’”. COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Cmd Res’ TO Range [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 2
Step
1 sec
Setting the Command response waiting time. If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Connect TO Range [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 30
Step
1 sec
Setting the Modem connection waiting time. If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a connection failure after the setting time, the status of modem failure is maintained.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Idle Time Range [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60
0 ~ 255 sec
Default 60sec
Step
1 sec
Setting the Modem connection close time. During setting time, the connection is closed after the setting time.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Use (Option) Range [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Idle Time: 60 >SMS Use?: DIABLE >SMS Time: 5
DIABLE,ENABLE
Default DIABLE
Step
~
Enable or disable Short Message Service (SMS) function.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Time (Option) Range [CONNECT PARAMETER] >Idle Time: 60 >SMS Use: DIABLE >SMS Time: 5
0~255sec
Default 5sec
Step
1sec
SMS Time is a waiting time to wait for response after a short message of SMS is sent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
69
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Type (Option) SINGLE, MULTI
Range [CONNECT PARAMETER] >SMS Use: DIABLE >SMS Time: 5 >SMS Type: MULTI
Default MULTI
Step
~
Single or Multiple type is supported for SMS message. Single type is to send one event’s information(max. 25 characters) including description and the occurring time of event in one SMS message. Multiple type is to send maximum 4 events’ information(max. 11 characters respectively) including only description of each event in one SMS message.
NOTE: The setting items, SMS Use, SMS Time and SMS Type, are shown on the menu of EVRC2A supporting SMS function.
70
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.2.5. EVENT&ETC Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC”. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Method Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Method: OFF > SKIP at Fault: YES > Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES
OFF,TH,DB,BOTH
Default OFF
Step
~
Select the Analog Event Type. This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event Active” in DNP point map. OFF : AI Point Event doesn’t occur. TH : Event occurs when the AI Point data is over or less than Threshold value. DB : Event occurs when the AI data change value is over the Deadband value. BOTH : TH and DB are both used. Use EVRC2A interface program to set “Event Active” enable or disable of AI point and the Threshold value and Deadband value.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / SKIP at Fault Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Method: OFF > SKIP at Fault: YES > Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES
NO,YES
Default YES
Step
~
Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated during Fault pickup.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Fault ‘I’ Evt Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Method: OFF > SKIP at Fault: YES > Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES
NO,YES
Default YES
Step
~
NO : No Fault current event generated. YES : Fault current event is generated at every fault sequence.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Queue Size Range [EVENT&ETC] > BI Queue Size: 256 > BI Evt Mode: ALL > AI Queue Size: 256
32,64,128,256
Default 256
Step
~
Set the Binary Queue Size.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
71
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Mode Range [EVENT&ETC] > BI Queue Size: 256 > BI Evt Mode: ALL > AI Queue Size: 256
ALL, LAST
Default ALL
Step
~
Set the Binary Event Mode. ALL : All status is buffed for the same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Queue Size Range [EVENT&ETC] > BI Queue Size: 256 > BI Evt Mode: ALL > AI Queue Size: 256
32,64,128,256
Default 256
Step
~
Step
~
Set the Analog Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Mode Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Mode: ALL > CI Queue Size: 256 > CI Evt Mode: ALL
ALL, LAST
Default ALL Set the Analog Event Mode.
ALL : All status is buffed for the same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point. COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Queue Size Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Mode: OFF > CI Queue Size: 256 > CI Evt Mode: ALL
32,64,128,256
Default 256
Step
~
Step
~
Set the Counter Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Mode Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI Evt Mode: ALL > CI Queue Size: 256 > CI Evt Mode: ALL
ALL, LAST
Default ALL Set the Counter Event Mode.
ALL : All Counter is buffed for the same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point.
72
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI ‘V’ Unit Range [EVENT&ETC] > CI Evt Mode: ALL > AI ‘V’ Unit: 10V > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K
1V, 10V
Default 10V
Step
~
Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with a voltage. 1V: 1V per 1count of transmitted data. If a voltage magnitude is 13.2kV, the corresponding AI point transmits 13200. 10V: 10V per 1count of transmitted data. If a voltage magnitude is 13.2kV, the corresponding AI point transmits 1320. NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.04 of EVRC2A_N6,NT. The data format of AI points associated with a voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10V per 1count .
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI ‘P’ Unit Range [EVENT&ETC] > CI Evt Mode: ALL > AI ‘V’ Unit: 10V > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K
1K, 10K
Default 10K
Step
~
Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with
a
power. 1K: 1K per 1count of transmitted data. If active power is 660kW, the corresponding AI point transmits 660. 10K: 10K per 1count of transmitted data. If active power is 660kW, the corresponding AI point transmits 66. NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.04 of EVRC2A_N6,NT. The data format of AI points associated with a voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10K per 1count .
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
73
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Max I Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K > Daily Max I: NO > Daily Energy: NO
NO,YES
Default NO
Step
~
Select whether to transfer the AI event about daily max. load current. NO : Daily Max. Load Current is not recorded as event. YES : Daily Max. Load Current is recorded as event. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A_N6,NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Energy Range [EVENT&ETC] > AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K > Daily Max I: NO > Daily Energy: NO
NO,YES
Default NO
Step
~
Select whether to transfer the AI event about energy at midnight. NO : Daily Energy is not recorded as event. YES : Daily Energy is recorded as event. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A_N6,NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Time Syn’ Ref Range [EVENT&ETC] >Daily Energy: NO >Tims Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Evt Time Type:LOCAL
LOCAL,GMT
Default LOCAL
Step
~
Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time Synching with the master station. NOTE : This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with GMT(in “TIME
SET&DIS TYPE” menu) are set up
incorrectly, the time internal clock in EVRC2A can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
74
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Evt Time Type Range [EVENT&ETC] >Daily Energy: NO >Tims Syn’ Ref:LOCAL >Evt Time Type:LOCAL
LOCAL,GMT
Default LOCAL
Step
~
Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication. NOTE : The location of “Evt Time Type” setting depends on EVRC2A_NT version. y Ver 7.04 and later : Within “RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICTION / EVENT&ETC” menu. y Prior to Ver 7.04 : Within “RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE”. The name of this setting is indicated as "Evt Sent Type".
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
75
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.3. Clock In order to configure current date and time, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLOCK” menu. The “CLOCK” menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version. Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A RELAY SETUP / CLOCK Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②, a cursor is marked
① [CURRENT TIME] 2009/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS
TO SET
to be able to change current date and time 1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to move to next item.
② [SETTING TIME] 2009/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS TO SAVE
2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save. Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings
③ [SAVE TIME] 2009/11/06 15;01:50 PRESS TO SAVE
If procedure of saving is completed, ④ is shown. If [ESC] button is pressed at ③, ⑤ is shown and the changed time settings are not saved.
④ [SAVE TIME] * SUCCESS *
⑤ [SAVE TIME] * ABORT *
76
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A RELAY SETUP / CLOCK Screen ① indicates the present time.
① [CURRENT TIME] L2009/01/01 09:00:00 G2009/01/01 00:00:00 PRESS TO SET [CURRENT TIME] L ⓐ G ⓑ PRESS TO SET
ⓐ Indicates the local time type’s present time. ⓑ Indicates the GMT time type’s present time. Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②, a cursor is marked to be able to change current date and time. It sets the present time to GMT Time or Local time according to the “TIME SET&DIS’ TYPE” menu’s “Set Type” setting.
② [SETTING TIME] L2009/01/01 09:00:00 PRESS TO SAVE
1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to move to next item. 2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save.
③ [SAVE TIME] L2009/01/01 09:00:00 PRESS TO SAVE
Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings If procedure of saving is completed, ④ is shown.
④ [SAVE TIME] * SUCCESS *
If [ESC] button is pressed at ③, ⑤ is shown and the changed time settings are not saved.
⑤ [SAVE TIME] * ABORT *
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
77
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.4. Event Recorder Event Recording elements are set such as Recording and Sampling timing and so on. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER” to select setting for the event recording elements. RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Fault Cycle [EVENT RECORDER] >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 >Load Profile: ON
ON, OFF
Range
Default ON
Step
~
Select On or Off for Fault Cycle recording. Recorded
Fault
Cycle
can
be
viewed
in
menu,
“EVENT
RECORDER”. RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Len’ of Pre F [EVENT RECORDER] >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 >Load Profile: ON
Range
0 ~ 14 cycle
Default 4
Step
1 cycle
Enter the length of prefault in fault cycle.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile [EVENT RECORDER] >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 >Load Profile: ON
Range
ON, OFF
Default ON
Step
~
Select On or Off for Load Profile recording. Recorded Load Profile can be viewed in menu, “EVENT RECORDER”.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m) [EVENT RECORDER] >Fault Cycle: ON >Len’ of Pre F: 4 >L.P save time(m):15
Range
5,10, 15,20,30,60 min
Default 15
Step
Set Load Profile recording interval.
78
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
~
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.5. Clear Saved Data In order to reset saved data, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu. RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA [CLEAR SAVED DATA] >1.Fault Cycle >2.System Status >3.Load Profile >4.Daignostic >5.Max Demand >6.Energy >7.Counter >8.Wear Monitor >9.Fault Trip >10.P-Quality Count >11.P-Quality Event >12.Comm’ Event >13.All Saved Data
FAULT CYCLE DATA PRESS ENT TO CLEAR
Clear Saved Data Select item for clearing and then press [ENT] button. If procedure of clearing is completed, the message, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” is shown. y Fault Cycle y System Status y Load Profile y Diagnostic y Max Demand y Energy
FAULT CYCLE DATA !! DATA CLEARED !!
y Counter y Wear Monitor y Fault Trip y P-Quality Counter y P-Quality Event y Communication Buffer y All Saved Data NOTE : It is recommended to have Backup data because Cleared(Deleted) data can not be recovered.
5.6. Factory Debug This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
79
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5.7. Gas Sensor Type Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE” to select setting for the gas sensor type. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE [GAS SENSOR TYPE] >Type Select: TYPE2
NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2
Range
Default NONE
Step
~
NONE : Gas Sensor is not used. TYPE1 : Set TYPE1 if Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005. TYPE2 : Set TYPE2 if Recloser manufactured from JULY, 2005. NOTE : According to a recloser type, they may be no this setting on the menu.
5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option It is to set Date Display for all related Menu. Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE”. RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Sign* [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] >Set Type: LOCAL >GMT Sign: >GMT Hour: 0
Range
+,-
Default
+
Step
~
Set GMT time and the local time off-set direction. Local time is faster than GMT time, select ‘+’, otherwise, select ‘-’.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Hour* [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] >Set Type: LOCAL >GMT Sign: >GMT Hour: 0
80
Range
0~23
Default
0
Step
1
Set the hour difference between local time and GMT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Min* [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] >GMT Hour: 0 >GMT Min : 0 >Disp’ Type: YMD
Range
0~59
Default 0
Step
1
Set the minute difference between local time and GMT.
NOTE Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00); Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0 NOTE If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened as follows. -
If the "Time Syn’ Ref" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in EVRC2A can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
-
If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event transmitted is not correct.
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 6.15 of EVRCA. RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Disp’ Type [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] >GMT Min : 0 >Disp’ Type: YMD >Time Syn’ Ref: GMT
Range
YMD, MDY
Default YMD
Step
~
YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Time Syn’ Ref [TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] >GMT Min : 0 >Disp’ Type: YMD >Time Syn’ Ref: GMT
Range
LOCAL, GMT
Default GMT
Step
~
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized with GPS(or IRIG). NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
81
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6. SYSTEM SETUP System set shall be set independently for each bank. However, from version 4.41, regardless of bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank. Sets following items for System y
CT Ratio
y
VT or PT Ratio
y
Power Line Frequency, Phase rotation
y
Panel sleep time
y
Opto-Input setting
y
Relay output setting
y
Loop Control setting – Option
y
Set Group Change setting – Option
y
Power Quality – Option
6.1. Current Sensing 6.1.1. Description This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for the neutral over-current. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram).
82
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.1.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Range
1 ~ 1200
Default 1000
Step
1
Enter the phase CT primary current value.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Range
1 ~ 1200
Default 1000
Step
1
Enter the ground CT primary current value.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio [CURRENT SENSING] PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 >SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Range
1 ~ 1200
Default 1000
Step
1
Enter the sensitive earth CT primary current value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
83
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.2. Line VS Sensing 6.2.1. Description To measure Source Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio. With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A can be used to perform voltage measurements, power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements.
6.2.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VS SENSING / Connect Type [LINE VS SENSING] >Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100.0 VT Ratio: 155.9
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA, VD-W, VD-D
Default VD-W
Step
~
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used. NONE : VT uninstalled. If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the system as Wye or Delta. WYE : Install type wye. DELTA : Install type delta. If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type. VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire. VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS 2nd(v) [LINE VS SENSING] Connect Type: NONE >VT 2nd(v): 100.0 VT Ratio: 155.9
Range
30.0 ~ 250.0 V
Default 100.0
Step
0.1 V
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V) This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS Ratio [LINE VS SENSING] Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100.0 >VT Ratio: 155.9
Range
10.0 ~ 760.0
Default 155.9
Step
0.1
Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.
84
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.2.3. Setting Examples Use of VD(CVD or RVD) Case of VD(CVD or RVD) installed in Recloser, setup as follows; Usable in Wye connection. Set VT2nd(v) 100 as Default. PT Ratio is calculated as below. VoltageФ-Ф = VoltageФ-N × SQRT(3) VoltageФ-N = VT 2nd(v) × VT Ratio Hence, 15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.66㎸Ф-N, therefore 8.66㎸Ф-N = 55.5(V) × 155.9 If user line voltage between phases (VoltageФ-Ф) is 11㎸, set VT2nd(v) of 40.7V and set VT Ratio of 155.9 (11㎸Ф-Ф => 6.35㎸Ф-N, 6.35㎸ = 40.7(V) × 155.9) 27㎸Ф-Ф = 15.59㎸Ф-N, therefore 15.59㎸Ф-N = 100(V) × 155.9 38㎸Ф-Ф = 21.94㎸Ф-N, therefore 21.94㎸Ф-N = 140.7(V) × 155.9 Use of External PT by User Line is Wye connection type and has VФ-Ф = 15㎸. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then VT Ratio is 14400/120. Because of 15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.66㎸Ф-N, VT2nd(v) is 8.66㎸Ф-N / 120 = 71.2V Line with Delta connection type and has VФ-Ф= 15㎸. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then VT Ratio is 14400/120 and VT2nd(v) is 15㎸Ф-Ф / 120 = 125V Table 6-1. VT Ratios of External PTs Line-Line Voltage
Voltage Divider
Potential Transformer
Wye connection
Wye connection
VT 2nd (v)
VT Ratio
VT 2nd (v)
15㎸
100
86.6
71.2
27㎸
100
155.9
72.5
38㎸
100
219.4
73.1
VT Ratio 120 (14400:120) 215 (25800:120) 300 (36000:120)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Delta connection VT 2nd (v) 125
125.6
126.7
VT Ratio 120 (14400:120) 215 (25800:120) 300 (36000:120)
85
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.3. Line VL Sensing 6.3.1. Description To measure Load Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio. With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A can be used to perform synchronism elements.
6.3.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Connect Type [LINE VL SENSING] >Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100.0 VT Ratio: 155.9
Range
NONE, WYE, DELTA, VD-W, VD-D
Default VD-W
Step
~
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used. NONE : VT uninstalled. If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the system as Wye or Delta. WYE : Install type wye. DELTA : Install type delta. If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type. VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire. VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT 2nd(v) [LINE VL SENSING] Connect Type: NONE >VT 2nd(v): 100.0 VT Ratio: 86.6
Range
30.0 ~ 250.0 V
Default 100.0
Step
0.1 V
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V) This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT Ratio [LINE VL SENSING] Connect Type: NONE VT 2nd(v): 100.0 >VT Ratio: 155.9
Range
10.0 ~ 760.0
Default 155.9
Step
0.1
Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.
86
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Install Type [LINE VL SENSING] VT 2nd(v): 100.0 VT Ratio: 155.9 >Install Type: 3P
Range
3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
Default 3P
Step
~
Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit. 3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed 1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the recloser body unit. 1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the recloser body unit. 1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the recloser body unit. NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed. y
Directional Control
y
Loss of Phase
y
Synchronism Check
y
Voltage Unbalance Detection
y
Live Load Blocking
y
Loop Control
NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
6.3.3. Setting Example Refer to (6.2.3. Setting Examples)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
87
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.4. System Power 6.4.1. Description Menu to set Frequency of Protected Line and installed Phase rotation
6.4.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Frequency [SYSTEM POWER] >Frequency: 50 Phase Rotation: ABC >Install Dir’: NOR
Range
50, 60 ㎐
Default 50
Step
~
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Rotation [SYSTEM POWER] Frequency: 50 >Phase Rotation: ABC >Install Dir’: NOR
Range
ABC, ACB
Default ABC
Step
~
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Install Direction [SYSTEM POWER] Frequency: 50 >Phase Rotation: ABC >Install Dir’: NOR
Range
NOR(NORMAL), REV(REVERSE)
Default NOR
Step
~
Select the install direction of Recolser. During operating after setup, change only this setting to convert a load side to a source side or reversely. NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed.
88
y
Directional Control
y
Loss of Phase
y
Synchronism Check
y
Voltage Unbalance Detection
y
Live Load Blocking
y
Loop Control
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
NOTE: The voltage sensing type to the load side can be checked on the setting of "Install Type" in the "LINE VL SENSING" menu. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Combination [SYSTEM POWER] >Phase Rotation: ABC >Install Dir’: NOR >Phase Combi’: abc
Range
abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba
Default abc
Step
~
Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is connected with phase C and bushing B is connected with phase A.
NOTE: The “Phase Combination” setting will be shown from version 6.04 of EVRC2AN6,NT. In order to get the details relevant to the connection for EVRC2A-N6,NT from version 6.04, refer the following figure and table.
Figure 6-1. Phase Connection
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
89
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 6-2. Phase Connection & Display Mapping Table Line feeding
Recommend Setting
Bushing Terminal
Phase
Phase Mapping Result Install Direction
Combination Case 1 :
abc
abc
NORAMAL
ABC Case 2 :
cab
cab
ABC Case 3 :
bca
bca
ABC Case 4 :
acb
acb
ABC Case 5 :
bac
bac
ABC Case 6 :
cba
cba
ABC Case 7 :
abc
abc
RST Case 8 :
cab
cab
RST Case 9 :
bca
bca
RST Case 10 :
acb
acb
RST Case 11 :
bac
bac
RST Case 12 :
cba RST
90
cba
REVERSE
LCD/INDEX Display :
Bushing/Controller
Source V(Load V) / Current
Terminal
Va(Vr)/Ia
A(R)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
C(T)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
B(S)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
A(R)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
C(T)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
B(S)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
A(R)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
B(S)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
B(S)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
C(T)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
C(T)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
A(R)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
R(A)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
T(C)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
S(B)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
R(A)/IA
Va(Vr)/Ia
T(C)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
S(B)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
R(A)/IA
Vb(Vs)/Ib
T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic
S(B)/IB
Va(Vr)/Ia
S(B)/IB
Vb(Vs)/Ib
R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic
T(C)/IC
Va(Vr)/Ia
T(C)/IC
Vb(Vs)/Ib
S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic
R(A)/IA
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.5. Panel Sleep Time 6.5.1. Description Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.
6.5.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / PANEL SLEEP TIME OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
Range
[PANEL SLEEP TIME] >Interval(m): 5
Default 5
Step
1 min
Enter the sleep mode entering time Setting the interval time of which Panel indicator turns into Sleep mode. On “sleep mode”, press [▼] button to be out from the “sleep mode”.
6.6. Opto Input Set - Option 6.6.1. Description Menu to set External input terminal function and Debounce time The opto input is available as an ordering option.
Status LCD Display
EXTERNAL INPUT
Debounce time X
Triger Function execute
X
REMOTE mode
Figure 6-2. Input logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
91
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.6.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Func [OPTO INPUT SET] >I1 Func: NONE I1 Debounce: 0.02 I2 Func: NONE
NONE, TRIP, … , OUT8 RESET
Range
Default NONE
Step
~
Enter the function of External input terminal Opto input can have following functions. NONE
TRIP
CLOSE
PROTECTION
GROUND
SEF
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
RECLOSE
CONTROL
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Enable/Disable
Locked/Unlocked
Enable/Disable
PROGRAM1
PROGRAM2
HOT LINE TAG
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
FAULT INDICATION RESET
BATTERY LOAD TEST
OUTPUT RELAY 1∼8 RESET.
For more details, refer to “Appendix A. OPTO INPUT FUNCTION”. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Debounce [OPTO INPUT SET] I1 Func: NONE >I1 Debounce: 0.02 I2 Func: NONE
Range
0.01 ~ 9.99 sec
Default 0.02
Step
Enter debounce time to prevent chattering in Input
Input 2 ~ Input 8, the same as Input 1 above
92
0.01 sec
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.7. Output Relay Set - Option 6.7.1. Description Menu to set External Output Terminal Function and Output type The output relay is available as an ordering option.
Protective Elements Relay Setting ( 50.51,27,59...etc ) Function Occurrence Status LCD Display S/R LATCH Pulse T Type
PULSE
Y
LATCH
Latch S Q R
OUTxx Relay
OPTO INPUT SET(OUTxx Reset) Pulse OUTPUT RELAY TEST
2s
Figure 6-3. Output logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
93
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.7.2. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Func [OUTPUT RELAY SET] >O1 Func: NONE O1 Type: S/R LATCH O1 Pulse T: 0.05
NONE, TRIP, … , NEQ FLT*
Range
Default NONE
Step
~
Enter the function of External output terminal. Output Relay can have following function. NONE
TRIP
CLOSE
FAIL TRIP
FAIL CLOSE
FAIL AC
FAIL BATTTERY
27 ELEMENT
59 ELEMENT
25 ELEMENT
81 ELEMENT
79 RESET
79CYCLE
79LOCKOUT
SELFCHECK
PROTECTION Enable
GROUND Enable
SEF Enable
RECLOSE Enable
CONTROL Locked
REMOTE Enable
PROGRAM1 Enable
PROGRAM2 Enable
HOT LINE TAG Enable
LO/RE OPEN
ALARM
CLOSE - 52A
INPUT 1~ 8
GAS LOW*
OPEN - 52B*
SYSTEM OK*
CLOSE BLOCK*
MECHANISM LOCK*
GAS LOW LOCK*
EXT’ TRIP LOCK*
INST FAULT*
DELAY FAULT*
PHASE FAULT*
GROUND FAULT*
ALTERNATE SETTINGS Enable
HIGH CURRENT LOCKOUT FAULT* SEF FAULT*
NEQ FAULT*
For more detail, refer to “Appendix B. RELAY OUTPUT FUNCTION”. NOTE : The function marked with ‘*’ is an option. That function may not be supported by the option type.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Type [OUTPUT RELAY SET] O1 Func: NONE >O1 Type: S/R LATCH O1 Pulse T: 0.05
Range
PULSE, LATCH, S/R LATCH
Default S/R LATCH
Step
~
S/R LATCH: Output signal is delivered only this function activates (ON). PULSE: Output signal is delivered only during PULSE T. To activate Output again, turn this function OFF and then, turn it ON again. LATCH: Output signal is delivered once this function ON. To turn it off, it needs Reset signal and it is set in “OPTO INPUT SET”
94
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Pulse T [OUTPUT RELAY SET] O1 Func: NONE O1 Type: S/R LATCH >O1 Pulse T: 0.05
Range
0.01 ~ 99.99 sec
Default 0.05
Step
0.01 sec
Sets Duration time if OUTPUT TYPE is PULSE
Output 2 ~ 8 is the same as above.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
95
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.8. Loop Control - Option The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs. Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point Recloser, TIE point Recloser. Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage). Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC) When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load side is disconnected. MIDpoint Recloser(MID) When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed. When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the load side. TIEpoint Recloser (TIE) TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV. When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and locks out. TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side and when both sides become DV.
96
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
LCD Initial Screen Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, are displayed on LCD Initial Screen. Press “ENT” KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode. LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE] Display a selected type. VS: [DV], [LV] Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage. VL: [DV], [LV] LOOP CONTROL [TIE] VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ] VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage. VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Recloser’s Source side. VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Recloser’s Load side. AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN] Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.
LOOP CONTROL KEY Use PROGRAM KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel. Program 1: Enable/Disables Loop control function. Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled. SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status. Program 2: Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of SEC, MID. Figure 6-4. Loop Control Key
Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled. Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
97
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.8.1. Setting PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select [LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select: NONE >VRS - S/M: VS >VRS - Tie: VS
Range
NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
Default NONE
Step
~
Select the Recloser Type and add Loop Control function. After selecting, press Program 1 Key to enable Loop Control. NONE : Loop control is not in use. SEC : SECtionalizing Recloser MID : MIDpoint Recloser TIE : TIEpoint Recloser
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M [LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select: NONE >VRS - S/M: VS >VRS - Tie: VS
Range
VS, VL
Default VS
Step
~
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used in SEC, MID. Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage Standard Model, EVRC2A uses VD(Voltage divider, CVD or RVD) to measure the voltage. It measures only A, B, C, R phases, phase S and T are not measured.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie [LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select: NONE >VRS - S/M: VS >VRS - Tie: VS
Range
VS, VL, VS&VL
Default VS
Step
~
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE. TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side voltage becomes dead line voltage.
98
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire [LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 1PN(A) >Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Range
3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
Default 3PN
Step
~
Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage sensor(VD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. VD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage. 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire [LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 1PN(A) >Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Range
3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
Default 3PN
Step
~
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage sensor(VD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for VD(CVD or RVD) type Control S,T phase are not measured. 3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
99
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt- Mid [LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 1PN(A) >Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Set Value is used in MID. Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting, after set time (LL Regain T). To use this function, Loop control (setting value) of Primary and Alternate shall be set as the same. OFF : Turn off auto change. ON : Turn on auto change.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt-Tie [LOOP CONTROL] >Cng Alt-Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE
Range
OFF, ON(VS), ON(VL), ON(BOTH)
Default OFF
Step
~
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE. Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting, after set time (LL Regain T). To use this function, Loop control (setting value) of Primary and Alternate shall be set as the same. OFF : Turn off auto change. ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS. ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL. ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.
100
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl [LOOP CONTROL] >Cng Alt-Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC. To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on. DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it) ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op [LOOP CONTROL] >Cng Alt-Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE
DISABLE, ENABLE
Range
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE. To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on. DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not automatically activated. (Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it) ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL [LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DL: 10.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 >DL V Max(%): 50.0
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE. After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain period, TIE opens by Loop control.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
101
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T [LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DL: 10.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 >DL V Max(%): 50.0
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID. This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enabled. SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage becomes Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close). MID, if a voltage selected form “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line, and when Loop control (“Chg Alt-Tie” is on, it automatically changes to Alternate Setting. After Loop control, Live Line becomes Tie Close, and during operation, it figures as a fault and Trip Lockout. After it becomes Live line, Restore (auto close and change to Primary setting).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL V Max(%) [LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DL: 10.00 >Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 >DL V Max(%): 50.0
Range
20.0 ~ 70.0 %
Default 50.0
Step
0.1 %
Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage. In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it determines Dead Line. In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VS Wire”. In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL V Min(%) [LOOP CONTROL] >LL V Min(%): 70.0 >DL Pickup T: 50.00 >LL Regain T: 10.00
Range
50.0 ~ 85.0 %
Default 70.0
Step
0.1 %
Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage. In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it determines Live Line. In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from “VS Wire”, In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.
102
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL Pickup T [LOOP CONTROL] >LL V Min(%): 70.0 >DL Pickup T: 50.00 >LL Regain T: 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 50.00
Step
0.01 sec
Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During “DL Pickup T”, the line becomes Dead Line and “LL Regain T” Timer shall be operated so that SEC, MID, TIE can operate. “DL Pickup T” Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation. Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by “DL rest T” Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or recloser’s reclosing time.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL Regain T [LOOP CONTROL] >LL V Min(%): 70.0 >DL Pickup T: 50.00 >LL Regain T: 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : “DL Pickup T” shall be finished and during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line. SEC’s reset Time shall be longer than MID 5 seconds, and MID’s shall be longer than TIE’s 5 seconds. When timer is finished, SEC is opened, MID changes Settings from Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Mid is enable), and TIE is closed automatically after changing settings form Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Tie is enable).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Time [LOOP CONTROL] >LL Regain T: 10.00 >DL Reset T: 5.00 >NRT After LC: 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Dead Bus Reset Time : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time from “DL Pickup T”. This timer operates when “DL Pickup T” is set and the line becomes Live line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
103
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LC [LOOP CONTROL] >LL Regain T: 10.00 >DL Reset T: 5.00 >NRT After LC: 10.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in MID, TIE. This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a fault after Loop control. After “LL Regain T” and changed Settings, while backward distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed. After “LL Regain T”, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.
104
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.8.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
Figure 6-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
105
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
Figure 6-6. MID Point Recloser Logic
106
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
http://www.entecene.co.kr
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Figure 6-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
107
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.8.3. Loop Control Application 5-Reclosers Loop Control For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC-MID-TIE. In “Table 6-3. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side. Table 6-3. 5-Reclosers Setting SETTING
CB1
RC1
RC2
RC3
RC4
RC5
CB2
Type Select
-
SEC
MID
TIE
MID
SEC
-
VRS – S/M
-
VS ←⎯⎯
VS ←⎯⎯
X
VS ⎯⎯→
VS ⎯⎯→
-
VRS – Tie
-
X
X
VS&VL
X
X
-
VS Wire
-
3PN
3PN
3PN
3PN
3PN
-
VL Wire
-
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
-
Cng Alt-Mid
-
X
ON
X
ON
X
-
Cng Alt-Tie
-
X
X
ON
X
X
-
LC After Cl
-
ENABLE
ENABLE
X
ENABLE
ENABLE
-
LC After Op
-
-
X
ENABLE
X
-
-
OT Both DL
-
X
X
10.00
X
X
-
Auto Rest’ T
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
DL V Max(%)
-
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
-
LL V Min(%)
-
70.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
-
DL Pickup T
-
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
-
LL Regain T
-
5.00
10.00
15.00
10.00
5.00
-
DL Reset T
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
NRT After LC
-
X
10.00
10.00
10.00
X
-
PROGRAM 1
-
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
-
PROGRAM 2
-
ENABLE
ENABLE
X
ENABLE
ENABLE
-
Reclose Time
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) “X” is not used.
108
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting. Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically, and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after AutoRestoration Time. Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
109
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Figure 6-9. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically. Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to Alternate setting. Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault. F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time. Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.
110
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
5-Reclosers Loop control at F3 Fault
Figure 6-10. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3) operate. When “LL Regain T” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically. Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault. F3 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3) Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
111
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3-Reclosers Loop Control For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE. In “Table 6-4. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC3 are installed for CB2 side. Table 6-4. 3-Reclosers Setting SETTING
CB1
RC1
RC2
RC3
CB2
Type Select
-
SEC
VRS – S/M
TIE
SEC
-
-
VS
←⎯⎯
X
VS
⎯⎯→
-
VRS – Tie
-
X
VS&VL
X
-
VS Wire
-
3PN
3PN
3PN
-
VL Wire
-
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
1PN(A)
-
Cng Alt-Mid
-
X
X
X
-
Cng Alt-Tie
-
X
ON
X
-
LC After Cl
-
ENABLE
X
ENABLE
-
LC After Op
-
-
ENABLE
-
-
OT Both DL
-
X
10.00
X
-
Auto Rest’ T
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
DL V Max(%)
-
50.0
50.0
50.0
-
LL V Min(%)
-
70.0
70.0
70.0
-
DL Pickup T
-
22.0
22.0
22.0
-
LL Regain T
-
5.00
10.00
5.00
-
DL Reset T
-
5.00
5.00
5.00
-
NRT After LC
-
X
10.00
X
-
PROGRAM 1
-
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
-
PROGRAM 2
-
ENABLE
X
ENABLE
-
Reclose Time
2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout) “X” is not used.
112
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, TIE has the same setting time. Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than SEC. When “LL Regain T” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line. Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto Restoration Time. Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
113
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Figure 6-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. Step2 :
“LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. When closing TIE(RC2), MID(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1). Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.
114
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.9. Set Group Change - Option Sometimes, Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). In this case, it is necessary to change Protection setting. EVRC2A has two options includes Primary Setting and Alternate Setting to help in this situation. And these settings can be selected automatically by “Set Group Change” function. PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SET GROUP CHANGE / Function [SET GROUP CHANGE] >Function: DISABLE >Time interval: 30
Range
DISABLE,ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
Set whether to use Set Group Change. When this function is used, Primary setting is applied if power flow is forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is reverse(backward). PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP/ SET GROUP CHANGE / Time interval [SET GROUP CHANGE] >Function: DISABLE >Time interval: 30
Range
10~180sec
Default 30
Step
1sec
If power flow is changed for this set time, setting group is changed.
Applying rules y
This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition. During fault detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition, it does not work.
y
This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage and at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
115
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6.10. Power Quality - Option Place the curser on “10. POWER QUALITY” in SYSTEM SETUP menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Power Quality elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below. SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Func (Option) [POWER QUALITY] >S-O Func: Disable >S-O Duration: 20 >SAG Func: Disable
Disable, Enable
Range
Default Disable
Step
~
It is to set event recording of supply outage enable or disable. Outage time, number of times and duration can be viewed in menu, “MAINTENANCE” and “EVENT RECORDER.” Refer to “11.4. Power Quality – Option” for more information.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >S-O Func: Disable >S-O Duration: 20 >SAG Func: Disable
1 ~3600 sec
Range
Default 20
Step
1 sec
It is to set event recording detect supply outage and to set time to get recovered from supply outage. Refer to “11.4. Power Quality – Option” for more information.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >S-O Func: Disable >S-O Duration: 20 >SAG Func: Disable
Disable, Enable
Range
Default Disable
Step
~
It is to set event recording of sag enable or disable.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >S-O Duration: 20 >SAG Func: Disable >SAG Pickup: 0.80
0.30 ~ 0.95 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Range
Default 0.80
Step
0.01
Set a detect level of Voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.
116
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >SAG Func: Disable >SAG Pickup: 0.80 >SAG Duration: 5
Range
1~60 cycle
Default 5
Step
1
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >SAG Pickup: 0.80 >SAG Duration: 5 >SWL Func: Disable
Range
Disable, Enable
Default Disable
Step
~
It is to set event recording of swell enable or disable.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >SWL Func: Disable >SWL Pickup: 1.20 >SWL Duration: 20
Range
1.05 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Default 1.20
Step
0.01
Set a detect level of voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >SWL Func: Disable >SWL Pickup: 1.20 >SWL Duration: 20
Range
1~60 cycle
Default 5
Step
1
Set a detect time for voltage swell(voltage high).
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBI Func: Disable >UBI Pickup: 30 >UBI Duration: 4.0
Range
Disable, Enable
Default Disable
Step
~
It is to set event recording of current unbalance enable or disable. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2AN6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
117
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBI Func: Disable >UBI Pickup: 30 >UBI Duration: 4.0
1 ~ 100 %
Range
Default 30
Step
1%
Set a detect level of current unbalance for Power Quality. Current unbalance is calculated by following formula.
UI rate =
I2 × 100 I1
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2AN6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBI Func: Disable >UBI Pickup: 30 >UBI Duration: 4.0
Range
0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
Default 4.0
Step
0.1 sec
Set a detect time of current unbalance. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Limit (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBI Pickup: 30 >UBI Duration: 4.0 >UBI Limit: 10
Range
0 ~ 630 A
Default 10
Step
1A
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element. If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance status point does not maked. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
118
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Func (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBV Func: Disable >UBV Pickup: 30 >UBV Duration: 4.0
Disable, Enable
Range
Default Disable
Step
~
It is to set event recording of voltage unbalance enable or disable. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Pickup (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBV Func: Disable >UBV Pickup: 30 >UBV Duration: 4.0
1 ~ 100 %
Range
Default 30
Step
1%
Set a detect level of voltage unbalance for Power Quality. Voltage unbalance is calculated by following formula.
UVrate =
V2 × 100 V1
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Duration (Option) > [POWER QUALITY] >UBV Func: Disable >UBV Pickup: 30 >UBV Duration: 4.0
Range
0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
Default 4.0
Step
0.1 sec
Set a detect time of voltage unbalance. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
119
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7. PROTECTION Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations
Figure 7-1. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations
120
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Protective Elements - ANSI Designations Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations Protective Elements
ANSI Designations
Four shot recloser
79
Phase fast time overcurrent
51P1
Ground fast time overcurrent
51G1
Negative sequence fast time overcurrent
46(51)-1
Phase delay time overcurrent
51P2
Ground delay time overcurrent
51G2
Negative sequence delay time overcurrent
46(51)-2
Sensitive Earth Fault protection
51SEF
Phase directional time control
67P
Ground directional time control
67G
Negative sequence directional time control
67I2
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault
67SEF
Phase instantaneous high current trip
50P1
Ground instantaneous high current trip
50G1
Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip
46(50)1
Phase High current trip lockout
50P2
Ground High current trip lockout
50G2
Negative sequence High current trip lockout
46(50)2
Under voltage 1
27-1
Under voltage 2
27-2
Over voltage 1
59-1
Over voltage 2
59-2
Under frequency
81U
Over frequency
81O
Synchronism check
25
Cold load pickup Sequence coordination Loss of Phase
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
121
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1. Reclose (79) After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer. If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic. The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel. The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA [OPERATIONS] >Lockout-PHA: Lockout-GND: Lockout-SEF:
Range 4 4 4
1~5
Default 4
Step
1
Select the total number of the phase trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND [OPERATIONS] Lockout-PHA: >Lockout-GND: Lockout-SEF:
Range 4 4 4
1~5
Default 4
Step
1
Select the total number of the ground trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF [OPERATIONS] Lockout-PHA: Lockout-GND: >Lockout-SEF:
Range 4 4 4
1~5
Default 4
Step
1
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip operations
122
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ [OPERATIONS] Lockout-GND: Lockout-SEF: >Lockout-NEQ:
Range 4 4 4
1~5
Default 4
Step
1
Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA [OPERATIONS] Lockout-GND: Lockout-SEF: >Fast Curve-PHA:
Range 4 4 2
0~5
Default 2
Step
1
Select the number of the phase fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining phase delay curve operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND [OPERATIONS] Lockout-SEF: Fast Curve-PHA: >Fast Curve-GND:
Range 4 2 2
0~5
Default 2
Step
1
Select a number for the ground fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining ground delay curve operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ [OPERATIONS] Fast Curve-PHA: Fast Curve-GND: >Fast Curve-NEQ:
Range 2 2 2
0~5
Default 2
Step
1
Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast curve operations. The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining negative sequence delay curve operations.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
123
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 1 [INTERVALS] >Reclose 1: 0.60 Reclose 2: 2.00 Reclose 3: 15.00
Range
0.50 ~ 600.00 sec(prior to Ver 6.11 of EVRC2A) 0.10 ~ 600.00 sec(from Ver 6.11 of EVRC2A)
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 2 [INTERVALS] Reclose 1: 0.60 >Reclose 2: 2.00 Reclose 3: 15.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 3 [INTERVALS] Reclose 1: 0.60 Reclose 2: 2.00 >Reclose 3: 15.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00sec
Default 15.00
Step
0.01
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 4 [INTERVALS] Reclose 2: 2.00 Reclose 3: 15.00 >Reclose 4: 15.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 15.00
Step
0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(AR) [INTERVALS] Reclose 3: 15.00 Reclose 4: 15.00 >Reset T(AR): 30.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 30.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select Reset time for auto reclose. The Reset time for auto reclose is used for the recloser to automatically reclose. Traditionally, the Reset time for auto reclose setting is used to set time for a delay longer than the incomplete sequence. If any overcurrent elements are picked up, the reset timer is reloaded. Reset timer can only count if all the overcurrent elements are cleared.
124
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(LO) [INTERVALS] Reclose 4: 15.00 Reset T(AR): 30.00 >Reset T(LO): 10.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select the Reset time for lockout. The auto reclose logic is disabled for a setting time delay after the recloser is manually/remotely closed. This prevents a fault from manual reclosing. This delay must be longer than the trip time delay for any protection not blocked after manual closing. If no overcurrent trip occurs after a manual close and this timer expires, the auto reclose logic automatically resets. Traditionally, the Reset Time from lockout setting is set shorter than the Reset time for auto reclose setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / C/P Wait [INTERVALS] Reset T(AR): 30.00 Reset T(LO): 10.0 >C/P Wait: 60.00
Range
1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 60.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select the close power waiting time. This timer is used to set the close power waiting time delay allowed to reclose. It is activated when the reclose logic is in the reclose cycle state. If this timer expires, the reclose logic is locked out.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
125
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.1. Lockout The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions : y
After a fault of distribution systems, the RECLOSE ENABLED LED in user interface panel is not lighted(ON).
y
When the high current lockout has occurred.
y
The recloser is manually closed and a fault occurs before the expiration of the reset time.
y
When recloser is manually opened.
y
After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the recloser’s 52a contacts do not change status of the recloser opened.
y
The close power waiting time delay has expired.
The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control and the reset time has expired. The following diagram shows the typical full protection sequence containing 2F2D (two fast and two delay) operations followed by lockout.
AMP FAULT CURRENT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
* LOCK-OUT * PICKUP CURRENT NORMAL CURRENT
TIME (1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
(6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC Figure 7-2. Protection sequence containing 2F2D operations followed by lockout
126
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.1.2. Reset If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence automatically reset after passing the reset time interval. If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the completion of the remaining sequence. The following block diagram shows the reset sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared. AMP FAULT CURRENT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) AUTO RESET TIME
* RESET * PICKUP CURRENT NOMAL CURRENT
TIME
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC
(2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC
(4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC Figure 7-3. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
127
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) The EVRC2A has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element contained in the EVR2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the EVRC2A. A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
128
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Phase Pickup Current Setup The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 S.E.F: OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 500
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent elements.
Phase Fast Time Overcurrent Setup The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Function [PHASE FAST] >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step
~
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Relays(0-8) [PHASE FAST] Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip. Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal. 0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected. 1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
129
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Curve [PHASE FAST] Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF >Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Default ANSI-STI
Step
~
Select the desired curve type : ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse, Definite Time(1s ,10s) IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Dial [PHASE FAST] Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI >Time Dial: 0.50
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time axis.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Adder [PHASE FAST] Curve: ANSI-STI Time Dial: 0.50 >Time Adder: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the time overcurrent curve function.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / M.R.T [PHASE FAST] Time Dial: 0.50 Time Adder: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.
130
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Reset Method [PHASE FAST] Time Adder: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST
INST, LINEAR
Range
Default INST
Step
~
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time [PHASE FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
Range
Default OFF
Step
1sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6, NT.
Phase Delay Time Overcurrent Setup The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time overcurrent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
131
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) The EVRC2A has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements within the EVRC2A and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the EVRC2A. A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the current level measured by the EVRC2A drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
132
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Ground Pickup Current Setup The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] >Phase: 500 >Ground: 250 S.E.F: OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 250
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent elements.
Ground Fast Time Overcurrent Setup The following setting is used to program the ground fast time overcurrent element. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Function [GROUND FAST] >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step
~
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, which will operate the Trip. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP&AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Relays(0-8) [GROUND FAST] Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Curve [GROUND FAST] Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF >Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Default ANSI-STI
Step
~
Select the desired curve type : ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse, Definite Time(1s ,10s) IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
133
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Dial [GROUND FAST] Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI >Time Dial: 0.50
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time axis.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Adder [GROUND FAST] Curve: ANSI-STI Time Dial: 0.50 >Time Adder: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the time overcurrent curve function.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / M.R.T [GROUND FAST] Time Dial: 0.50 Time Adder: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Reset Method [GROUND FAST] Time Adder: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step
~
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units.
134
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time [GROUND FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
Range
Default OFF
Step
1sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation. NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6, NT.
Ground Delay Time Overcurrent Setup The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time overcurrent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
135
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, EVRC2A has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s (standard) or connected to a separate window type ZCT. The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current. The SEF element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [SEF ENABLED] in user interface panel. For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero sequence voltage(V0). The VD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded. The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.
SEF Pickup Current Setup PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] >Phase: 500 >Ground: 250 >S.E.F: OFF
Range* Default
OFF, 4 ~ 160A (prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A) OFF, 1 ~ 160A (from Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A) OFF
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of SEF element. NOTE : The user shall request a CT that satisfies the relevant accuracy when setting below 2A so that the SEF element operates properly. NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the setting range of this item is “OFF, 0.1~16.0 (0.1A Step)”. It is possible to check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed by checking “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ CONTROL TYPE” menu. Refer to “9.4. Control Type”.
136
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
SEF Element Setup PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Function [ SEF ELEMENT ] >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Time Delay: 1.00
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step
~
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Relays(0-8) [ SEF ELEMENT ] Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Time Delay: 1.00
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Time Delay [ SEF ELEMENT ] Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF >Time Delay: 1.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 1.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of Sensitive Earth Fault setting programs a definite time delay for the Sensitive Earth Fault. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
137
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) The EVRC2A has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting, and reset type. The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external devices on the distribution system. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
NEG Pickup Current Setup The following setting is used to program the NEQ pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq [PICKUP CURRENT(A)] Ground: 250 S.E.F: OFF >NEG Seq: OFF
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default OFF
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent elements.
138
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Negative Sequence Fast Time Overcurrent Setup The following setting is used to program the negative sequence fast time overcurrent element. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Function [NEG SEQ FAST] >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step
~
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Relays(0-8) [NEG SEQ FAST] Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve [NEG SEQ FAST] Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF >Curve: ANSI-STI
Range
ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Default ANSI-STI
Step
~
Select the desired curve type : ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse, Definite Time(1s ,10s) IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial [NEG SEQ FAST] Relays(0-8): OFF Curve: ANSI-SI >Time Dial: 0.50
Range
0.05 ~ 15.00
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the vertical time axis.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
139
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Adder [NEG SEQ FAST] Curve: ANSI-STI Time Dial: 0.50 >Time Adder: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the time overcurrent curve function.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T [NEG SEQ FAST] Time Dial: 0.50 Time Adder: 0.00 >M.R.T: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method [NEG SEQ FAST] Time Adder: 0.00 M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST
Range
INST, LINEAR
Default INST
Step
~
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical units.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time [NEG SEQ FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
Default OFF
Step
1sec
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation. NOTE : This setting is supported from vesion 6.03 of EVRC2AN6, NT.
140
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Negative Sequence Delay Time Overcurrent Setup The negative sequence delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the negative sequence fast time overcurrent.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
141
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1) The EVRC2A has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the EVRC2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel. Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase high current trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Function [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Relays(0-8) [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup(A) [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(A): 4000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Phase High Current Trip Element. This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High Current Trip Element.
142
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Active Trip [ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Pickup(A): 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Trip: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
1
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
143
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) The EVRC2A has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Function [ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Relays(0-8) [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup(A) [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(A): 4000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Trip Element. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current Trip Element.
144
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Active Trip [ H/C TRIP-GND ] Pickup(A): 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Trip: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
1
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
145
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) The negative sequence high current trip in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] on user interface panel. The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for negative sequence high current trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Function [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Relays(0-8) [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup(A) [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(A): 4000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 4000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. High Current Trip Element. This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High Current Trip Element.
146
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Active Trip [ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Pickup(A): 4000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Trip: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
1
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
147
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) The EVRC2A has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated. The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate setting and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel. The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase high current trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Relays(0-8) [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
148
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup(A) [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(A): 8000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 8000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Active Trip [ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Pickup(A): 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Trip: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
1
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
149
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) The EVRC2A has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout element in the EVRC2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current lockout. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Relays(0-8) [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup(A) [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(A): 8000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 8000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.
150
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Time Delay [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Active Trip [ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Pickup(A): 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Trip: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
1
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
151
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) The EVRC2A has a negative sequence high current lockout element. Negative sequence high current lockout element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current lockout element provides a definite time delay characteristic versus current. The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel. Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Function [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Relays(0-8) [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
152
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Pickup(A) [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(A): 8000
Range
10 ~ 20000 A
Default 8000
Step
1A
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. High Current Lockout Element. This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High Current Lockout Element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Time Delay [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(A): 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high current trip operates instantaneously.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Active Trip [ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Pickup(A): 8000 Time Delay: 0.00 >Active Trip: OFF
Range
OFF, 1 ~ 5
Default OFF
Step
1
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the second trip operation and every following trip operation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
153
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.12. Cold Load Pickup The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused by the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. EVRC2A provides “CLPU-Type 1” to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current occurring by the closing of device on a power line and “CLPU-Type 2” to prevent protection elements from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
7.12.1. Cold Load Pickup – Type 1 The settings of “CLPU-Type 1” are separated and set respectively for phase, ground, SEF or negative phase over current element. In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated, the overcurrent protection element will be operated under settings of “CLPU-Type 1” function at the restoration of load supply. NOTE: According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (52A) by local or remote control. When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage, the inrush current over overcurrent pickup level may occur. At occurrence of the cold load pickup, EVRC2A increases the pickup level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time, the Fast overcurrent protection element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout are always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function) If a fault occurs on distributed system, an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number of shots. A power is lost and then after certain outage time, the algorithm of cold load pickup function is applied at the restoration of load supply. If the “Make use ‘1’” is set to be “YES”, the algorithm
154
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
is applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If “NO” is set, the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time, the recloser is closed manually. If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs, the protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately. If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain outage time, the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of the cold load pickup current. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration of load current), protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time (RMT) is expired.
Trip Area
Time
Non Trip Area
Delay Curve
Current Overcurrent Pickup Level
Cold load Pickup Level
Figure 7-4. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules. The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR), the cold load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual close or restoration of load current. If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load pickup current, the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush Current 1 in “Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
155
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current, protection functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT), (Refer the Inrush Current 2 in “Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). After RMT, the protection functions are operated. However, if the over current is dropped below overcurrent pickup current during the RMT, the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the Inrush Current 3 in “Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).
Current Outage time
Restore Minimum Time
Inrush current 1 Trip
CLPU Pickup Level
Inrush current 2 Trip
Overcurrent Pickup Level
Inrush current 3 Time
Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout, the high current trip and high current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function.
156
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.12.2. Cold Load Pickup – Type 2 In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user. Over Current Pickup Level Step Up At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is risen as follows.
⎛ Without Supply Time ⎞ Operational Cold Load Multi' = 1 + ⎜⎜ × ( E − CLP Multi' −1) ⎟⎟ ⎝ E − CLP Time ⎠ As example, when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3. Over Current Pickup Level Step Down If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1. When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the cold load multiple in “Figure 7-6. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows. NOTE: The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
157
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Figure 7-6. Cold Load Multipilier
7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.
CLPU COMMON Setup PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Function [CLPU-COMMON] >Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF Make use ‘I’: NO
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default TRIP
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Relays [CLPU-COMMON] Function: TRIP >Relays(0-8): OFF Make use ‘I’: NO
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
158
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Make use ‘I’ [CLPU-COMMON] Function: TRIP Relays(0-8): OFF >Make use ‘I’: NO
NO,YES
Range
Default NO
Step
~
This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup function. If “YES” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a load current is restored (over 2A). If “NO” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a recloser is manually closed by local or remote control.
CLPU-TYPE1 Setup This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / PHA [CLPU-TYPE1] >PHA(A): 2000 GND(A): 2000 >SEF(A): 20
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the phase overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / GND [CLPU-TYPE1] >PHA(A): 2000 >GND(A): 2000 >SEF(A): 20
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the ground overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / SEF [CLPU-TYPE1] PHA(A): 2000 GND(A): 2000 >SEF(A): 20
Range* 4 ~ 2000A Default
20
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the SEF overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated. NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the setting range of this item is “0.4~200.0A (0.1A Step)”. It is possible to check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed by checking “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ CONTROL TYPE” menu. Refer to “9.4. Control Type”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
159
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1/ NEQ [CLPU-TYPE1] GND(A): 2000 SEF(A): 2000 >NEQ(A): 2000
Range
10 ~ 20000A
Default 2000
Step
1A
Selects the raised pickup current for the negative sequence overcurrent element while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Outage Time [CLPU-TYPE1] SEF(A): 2000 NEQ(A): 2000 >Outage Time: 10.0
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 10.0
Step
0.01 sec
Select the outage time required for a open of recloser to be considered cold.
Figure 7-7. Outage Time Logic Diagram PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Time [CLPU-TYPE1] NEQ(A): 2.00 Outage Time: 10.0 >RMT Time: 5.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load. The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal pickup level.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Func-PHA [CLPU-TYPE1] Outage Time: 10.0 RMT Time: 5.00 >RMT Func-PHA: ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function. ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time), Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level). OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time), Inrush current restraint algorithm remains. Lower than over current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst TimePHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and over current protection function operates.
160
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
※. NOTE : RMT Func-GND, RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG, the same as RMT FuncPHA above. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Reset Time [CLPU-TYPE1] RMT Func-SEF: ON RMT Func-NEQ: ON >Reset Time: 0.60
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.60
Step
0.01 sec
Select the cold load reset time required for the inrush load. If the cold load currents drop below nominal pickup levels, the cold load pickup feature is returned the normal sequence when the cold load reset time expires.
CLPU-TYPE2 Setup This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2 / E-CLP Multi’ [CLPU-TYPE2] >E-CLP Multi’: 2.0 E-CLP Time(m): 10
Range
0.0 (OFF),1.0~5.0
Default 2.0
Step
0.1
Set the multiple of cold load. If OFF is set, the cold load multiple is not applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied for overcurrent pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2/ E-CLP Time [CLPU-TYPE2] >E-CLP Multi’: 2.0 >E-CLP Time(m): 10
Range
1~720min
Default 10
Step
1
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup level is risen or dropped.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
161
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.13. Directional Controls (67) The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, neutral, sensitive ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements. If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be different in the Primary and Alternate settings. NOTE : In case of VD(CVD or RVD) type Recloser, EVRC2A only measures voltages without checking directional elements.
7.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P) The positive sequence voltage V1 provides the direction of phase pole in the power system. The phase direction is determined as comparing the positive sequence voltage(V1) to the direction of the positive sequence current(I1). The maximum torque angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠300 degree over V1. If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the phase direction control will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the phase overcurrent element, which is non-directional. The phase direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only. Following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I1 directional polarization in the complex plane.
162
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
Polarizing Referance Voltage:
http://www.entecene.co.kr
V1
T ro Ze
Typical Fault Angle
orq e Lin ue
I1 M
um im ax
T
e Lin ue q r o
Maximum Torque Angle : set 300 degree
ard rw Fo rse ve Re
Figure 7-8. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / Type [PHASE DIRECTION] >Type: OFF M.T.A: 300 M.P.V: 0.20
Range
OFF, FOR, REV
Default OFF
Step
~
OFF : None direction FOR : Forward direction REV : Reverse direction
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.T.A [PHASE DIRECTION] Type: OFF >M.T.A: 300 M.P.V: 0.20
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 300
Step
1 degree
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing voltage. For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
163
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V [PHASE DIRECTION] Type: OFF M.T.A: 300 >M.P.V: 0.20
Range
0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Default 0.20
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.
PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / BLOCK OC [PHASE DIRECTION] M.T.A: 300 M.P.V: 0.20 >BLOCK OC: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
~
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage. If BLOCK OC = NO, then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted. If BLOCK OC = YES, then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked. NOTE ) EVRC2A version prior to 5.1 this setting is applied conversely. For example, “NO” indicates that directional elements will be blocked by M.P.V. “YES” indicates that directional elements will be operated regardless of M.P.V.
7.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G) The zero sequence voltage 3V0 provides the direction of ground control in the power system. The ground direction is determined as comparing the zero sequence voltage(3V0) to the direction of the zero sequence current(Ig). The Maximum Torque Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠135 degree over 3V0. If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the ground direction control will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the ground overcurrent element, which is non-directional. The ground direction control can be programmed to either non-direction or provide a trip for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.
164
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for Ig directional polarization in the complex plane.
rq ue
Li n
e
-V0
To
im um
Ig
To
ro Ze
Fault Current
M ax
ue rq Re ve rs e
Fo
rw ar d
ne Li Polarizing Referance Voltage:
V0
Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for Ig Directional Polarization The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / Type [GROUND DIRECTION] >Type: OFF M.T.A: 135 M.P.V: 0.20
Range
OFF, FOR, REV
Default OFF
Step
~
OFF : None direction FOR : Forward direction REV : Reverse direction
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
165
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / M.T.A [GROUND DIRECTION] Type: OFF >M.T.A: 135 M.P.V: 0.20
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 135
Step
1 degree
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage. For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠135 degree. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V [GROUND DIRECTION] Type: OFF M.T.A: 135 >M.P.V: 0.20
Range
0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Default 0.20
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage. For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V will be approximately 0.10 x VT.
PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION/DIRECTION/GROUND DIRECTION/BLOCK OC [GROUND DIRECTION] M.T.A: 135 M.P.V: 0.20 >BLOCK OC: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
~
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage. If BLOCK OC = NO, then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted. If BLOCK OC = YES, then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked. NOTE ) EVRC2A version prior to 5.1 this setting is applied conversely. For example, “NO” indicates that directional elements will be blocked by M.P.V. “YES” indicates that directional elements will be operated regardless of M.P.V.
166
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.13.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF) The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls.
7.13.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46)) The negative sequence voltage V2 provides the direction of negative sequence pole in the power system. The negative sequence direction control is determined as comparing the negative sequence voltage(V2) to the direction of the negative sequence current(I2). The Maximum Torque Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠135 degree over V2. If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the negative sequence direction control will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the negative sequence overcurrent element which is non-directional. The negative sequence direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only. The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I2 directional polarization in the complex plane.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
167
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
To rq ue
Li ne
-V2
To
im um
ro Ze
Fault Current I2
n Li
M
ax
ue rq e Re ve rs e
Fo rw
ar d
Maximum Torque Angle : set 135 degree
Polarizing Referance Voltage:
V2
Figure 7-10. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / Type [NEQ DIRECTION] >Type: OFF M.T.A: 135 M.P.V: 0.20
Range
OFF, FOR, REV
Default OFF
Step
~
OFF : None direction FOR : Forward direction REV : Reverse direction
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.T.A [NEQ DIRECTION] Type: OFF >M.T.A: 135 M.P.V: 0.20
Range
0 ~ 359 degree
Default 135
Step
1 degree
Enter the maximum torque angle. The maximum torque angle setting determines the directional operating current for the polarizing voltage.
168
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.P.V [NEQ DIRECTION] Type: OFF M.T.A: 135 >M.P.V: 0.20
Range
0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Default 0.20
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage. For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V will be approximately 0.10 x VT.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / BLOCK OC [NEQ DIRECTION] M.T.A: 135 M.P.V: 0.20 >BLOCK OC: NO
Range
NO, YES
Default NO
Step
~
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage. If BLOCK OC = NO, then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted. If BLOCK OC = YES, then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked. NOTE ) EVRC2A version prior to 5.1 this setting is applied conversely. For example, “NO” indicates that directional elements will be blocked by M.P.V. “YES” indicates that directional elements will be operated regardless of M.P.V.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
169
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.14. Undervoltage (27) Two undervoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage drops below a specified voltage for a specified time. The undervoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings. The undervoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two phase and three phase. The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent protective elements. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Undervoltage 1 Setup The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Function [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0.70
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8) [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0.70
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
170
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT) [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(xVT): 0.70
0.00 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Range
Default 0.70
Step
0.01
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(70/100) = 0.70 × VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0.70 >Time Delay : 5.00
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Range
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Min. V(xVT) [UNDER VOLTAGE Pickup(xVT): Time Delay : >Min. V(xVT):
1] 0.70 5.00 0.10
0.00 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Range
Default 0.10
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage. Used to prevent the undervoltage 1 element for voltage below this level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip condition.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type [UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Time Delay : 5.00 Min. V(xVT): 0.10 >Pickup Type: 1P
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
~
Select the type of phase required for operation. 1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value is under the pickup voltage level. 2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage values are under the pickup voltage level. 3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are under the pickup voltage level.
Undervoltage 2 Setup The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
171
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.15. Overvoltage (59) Two overvoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage rises above a specified voltage for a specified time. The overvoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings . The overvoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two phase and three phase. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Overvoltage 1 Setup The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Function [OVER VOLTAGE 1] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 1.20
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8) [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 1.20
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT) [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(xVT): 1.20
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT
Default 1.20
Step
0.01
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100 V, and an alarm is required whenever the voltage exceeds 120 V, enter 120 / 100 = 1.20 for the pickup.
172
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 1.20 >Time Delay : 5.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 5.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type [OVER VOLTAGE 1] Pickup(xVT): 1.20 Time Delay : 5.00 >Pickup Type: 1P
Range
1P, 2P, 3P
Default 1P
Step
~
Select the type of phase required for operation. 1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value is over the pickup voltage level. 2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage values are over the pickup voltage level. 3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are over the pickup voltage level.
Overvoltage 2 Setup The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
173
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.16. Frequency(81) EVRC2A has underfrequency and overfrequency elements to detect unusual frequency in power system. Explanation for each element is below.
Underfrequency (81U) Underfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency drops below a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay. The underfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs. The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
Overfrequency (81O) Overfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency rises above a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay. The overfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs. The overfrequency minimum voltage and overfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the overfrequency is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
Frequency Setup The underfrequency and overfrequency element should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Function [FREQUENCY] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
174
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Relays(0-8) [FREQUENCY] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Pickup(Hz) [[FREQUENCY] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Range
40.00 ~ 60.00 Hz
Default 45.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 60㎐, and load shedding is required at 55.00㎐, enter 55.00 for this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Time Delay [FREQUENCY] Relays(0-8): OFF Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 >Under TD: 2.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay for underfrequency.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Pickup(Hz) [[FREQUENCY] Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 Under TD: 2.00 >Over Pu(Hz): 65.00
Range
50.00 ~ 70.00 Hz
Default 55.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 60㎐, and load shedding is required at 65.00㎐, enter 65.00 for this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Time Delay [FREQUENCY] Under TD: 2.00 Over Pu(Hz): 65.00 >Over TD: 6.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 6.00
Step
0.01 sec
Set the definite time delay for Overfrequency.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
175
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. V(xVT) [FREQUENCY] >Over TD: 6.00 >Min. V(xVT): 0.10 >Min. I(A): 10
0.00 ~ 1.25
Range
Default 0.10
Step
0.01
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the frequency element to Operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. I(A) [FREQUENCY] >Over TD: 6.00 >Min. V(xVT): 0.10 >Min. I(A): 10
Range
10 ~ 1600A
Default 10
Step
1A
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the frequency element to operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL Func’ [FREQUENCY] >Min. I(A): 10 >NFCL Func’: OFF >NFCL TD: 60.0
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Enable or disable “CLOSE” function when the frequency becomes normal.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL TD [FREQUENCY] >Min. I(A): 0.01 >NFCL Func’: OFF >NFCL TD: 60.0
Range
0.0 ~ 6000.0 sec
Default 60.0
Step
Set the time delay before “CLOSE” operation.
176
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
0.1
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.17. Other Element 7.17.1. Sequence Coordination When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, EVRC2A contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault current. The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature. 1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series. 2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series. 3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those of Down-line Reclosers. 4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose operation of Down-lines. The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi' [ OTHER ELEMENT ] >Seq’ Coordi’: OFF L.O Priority: GND F/I Reset: AUTO
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are connected in series. If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
177
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
As shown in “Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line Recloser, the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step. Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence Coordination function cannot be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting Reset Time Counter Close Back Up
EVR 1
Down line
EVR 2
Open
Close Lockout Status Open Time
Faulted
Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram
7.17.2. Other Element PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority [OTHER ELEMENT] Seq’ Coordi’: OFF >L.O Priority: GND F/I Reset: AUTO
Range
PHA, GND
Default GND
Step
Lockout priority PHA : Phase prior GND : Ground prior
178
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
~
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset [OTHER ELEMENT] Seq’ Coordi’: OFF L.O Priority: GND >F/I Reset: AUTO
Range
AUTO, MANUAL
Default AUTO
Step
~
Faulted Indicator reset method AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes normal. MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close [OTHER ELEMENT] L.O Priority: GND F/I Reset: AUTO >D/T M-Close: 0.00
Range
0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Default 0.00
Step
0.01 sec
Time delay for manual close
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
179
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves The EVRC2A is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves, user-defined curves and all 37 non standard recloser curves are available. A Configuration setting determines whether elements set to use ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves, user-defined curves reset instantaneously, or corresponding with electromechanical. The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3. The operation times and reset times are defined as follows : ANSI/IEEE Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) IEC Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA) ESB Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) USER-DEFINED Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2)) Table 7-2. Curve Factor TD
Time dial
TA
Time adder
α, β, γ
Characteristic constant
M
Multiples of pickup current
Rt
Reset characteristic constant NOTE ) 1) “Time Dial” and “Time Adder” settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively. 2) “Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸,
otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.
180
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Related Setting Menu 1) USER CURVE 1 PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a [USER CURVE 1] >Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0000 Factor r: 1.8000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 59.5000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor α
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b [USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000 >Factor b: 2.0000 Factor r: 1.8000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 2.0000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor β
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r [USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0000 >Factor r: 1.8000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 1.8000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor γ
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt [USER CURVE 1] Factor b: 2.0000 Factor r: 1.8000 >Factor rt: 59.5000
Range
0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Default 59.5000
Step
0.0001
User defined curve factor rt
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 : USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
181
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Standard Curve Coefficients Table 7-3. ANSI/IEEE Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Moderately Inverse
0.0107
0.020
0.0231
1.0700
Normally Inverse
5.9500
2.000
0.18
5.9500
Very Inverse
3.985
2.000
0.095
3.985
Extremely Inverse
5.9100
2.000
0.0345
5.9100
Short Time Inverse
3.56e-3
0.02
1.95e-2
0.356
Short Time Very Inverse
1.9925
2.000
0.0475
1.992
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Standard Inverse
0.1400
0.0200
0.0
9.700
Very Inverse
13.500
1.000
0.0
13.500
Extremely Inverse
80.000
2.000
0.0
80.000
Long Time Inverse
135.000
1.000
0.0
135.00
Short Time Inverse
0.0500
0.0400
0.0
0.500
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Standard Inverse
0.011
0.02
0.042
9.000
Very Inverse
3.985
1.95
0.1084
3.985
Long Time Very Inverse
15.94
1.95
0.4336
15.94
Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
User1
59.5000
2.0000
1.8000
59.5000
User2
39.8500
2.0000
0.9500
39.8500
User3
59.1000
2.0000
0.3450
59.1000
User4
5.6700
2.0000
0.0352
5.6700
Table 7-4. IEC
Table 7-5. ESB
Table 7-6. User Defined
182
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 7-7. Definite Time Curves
α
β
γ
Rt
Definite Time 1sec
0.0
-
1.0
1.0
Definite Time 10sec
0.0
-
10.0
10.0
Table 7-8. Non Standard Curves McGraw-Edison recloser curves Phase
Ground
Old
New
Old
New
A
101
1
102
B
117
2
135
C
133
3
140
D
116
4
106
E
132
5
114
F
163
6
136
H
122
7
152
J
164
8
113
KP
162
8*
111
L
107
9
131
M
118
11
141
N
104
13
142
P
115
14
119
R
105
15
112
T
161
16
139
V
137
17
103
W
138
18
151
Y
120
KG
165
Z
134
-
-
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
183
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
15.00 13.00 11.00
TIME(SECONDS)
2
2
9.00 7.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
5.00 4.00 3.00
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
2.00 0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.05
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
184
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.05
0.04
100
0.05
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
15.00 13.00 11.00
2
2
9.00 7.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
5.00 4.00 3.00
0.5 0.4
0.5 0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.50
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01 2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
185
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
15.00 13.00 11.00
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
9.00 7.00
0.5
5.00
0.5
0.4
4.00
0.4
0.3
3.00
0.3
0.2
2.00
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
1.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.05
0.50
0.05
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
186
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.04
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
15.00
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
13.00
0.5
11.00
0.4
0.4
9.00 0.3
0.3
7.00
0.2
0.2
5.00 4.00 3.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
2.00
0.05
0.05
1.00
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.50
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
0.01 200
0.01 100
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
187
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
15.00 13.00 9.00
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
7.00
0.5
11.00
0.4
0.4
5.00 0.3
0.3
4.00 3.00
0.2
0.2
2.00 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
1.00
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.50
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-16. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
188
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
0.01 500
0.01 400
0.02
300
0.02
200
0.03
100
0.03
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
8k 9k 10k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
7k
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
15.00 13.00 11.00
0.5
0.5
9.00
0.4
0.4
7.00 0.3
0.3
5.00 0.2
0.2
4.00 3.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
2.00
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.05
1.00
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.50
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
0.01 400
0.01 300
0.02
200
0.02
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-17. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
189
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC STANDARD INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
TIME(SECONDS)
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves
2
1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.4 0.3
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1
0.2
0.05
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-18. IEC Standard Inverse Curves
190
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.05
0.04
100
0.05
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
900 1k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
1.00
0.4
0.4
0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.4 0.3 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07
0.2
0.06
0.06
0.05
0.05
0.1 0.04
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.05
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
0.01 400
0.01 300
0.02
200
0.02
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
8) IEC Very Inverse Curves
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-19. IEC Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
191
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
1.00
0.05
0.8 0.7 0.6
0.04
0.5
0.05 0.04
0.4 0.03
0.03
0.3 0.02
0.02
0.2 0.1 0.05
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-20. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
192
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
0.01 100
0.01
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
1.00
4
4
0.8 0. 7 0. 6
3
3
0. 5 2
0. 4 0. 3 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.1 0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.05
8k 9k 10k
7k
0.01
6k
0.01 5k
0.02
4k
0.02
3k
0.03
2k
0.03
800 900 1k
0.04
700
0.05
0.04
600
0.05
500
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
400
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
300
0.2
200
0.2
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-21. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
193
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
1.00
0.3
0.3
0.8 0.7 0.6
0.2
0.2
0.5 0.4 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.3
0.2
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.04
0.1 0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.05
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-22. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
194
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
0.01 100
0.01
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70
8k 9k 10k
6k
5k
4k
7k
100 90 80 70
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
60 50 40
60 50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
15.00 13.00 11.00
2
2
9.00 7.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
5.00 4.00 3.00
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
2.00
0.3
0.3
0.2
1.00
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.50
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01 2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
12) ESB Inverse Curves
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-23. ESB Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
195
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
13) ESB Very Inverse Curves
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
TIME(SECONDS)
2
2
15.00 13.00 11.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
9.00 7.00 5.00
0.5
0.5
4.00 0.4
0.4
3.00 0.3
0.3
2.00 0.2
0.2
1.00 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.05
0.05
Figure 7-24. ESB Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
0.01 600
0.01 500
0.02
400
0.02
300
0.03
200
0.03
100
0.04
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
196
0.05
0.04
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
15.00 13.00
5
11.00
5
4
9.00
4
3
7.00
3
5.00 2
4.00 3.00 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
2.00
0.5
0.5
1.00 0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.50
8k 9k 10k
7k
0.01
6k
0.01 5k
0.02
4k
0.02
3k
0.03
2k
0.03
800 900 1k
0.04
700
0.05
0.04
600
0.05
500
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
400
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
300
0.2
200
0.2
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-25. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
197
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
40
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k 9k 10k 50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
D2
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
D1
0.01
0.01
Figure 7-26. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
0.02
7k
0.02
6k
0.03
5k
0.03
4k
0.04
3k
0.05
0.04
2k
0.05
800 900 1k
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
700
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
600
0.2
500
0.2
400
0.3
300
0.4
0.3
200
0.5
0.4
100
0.5
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
198
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : D1, D2 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
15) Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : A, B, C, D, E CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
C
D
B E
0.05
0.05
A
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.04
100
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
16) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-27. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
199
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k
100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : KP, L, M, N CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
17) Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
KP 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
L M N
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)
200
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.05
0.04
100
0.05
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : P, R, T, V CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
V
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
T
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
R P
0.05
0.05
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.02
600
0.02
500
0.03
400
0.03
300
0.04
200
0.04
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
18) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
201
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : W, Y, Z CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
TIME(SECONDS)
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
19) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
Z 0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
W 0.2
0.2
Y
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
202
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
0.01 3k
0.01 2k
0.02
800 900 1k
0.02
700
0.03
600
0.03
500
0.04
400
0.05
0.04
300
0.05
200
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
100
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
3
2
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
5 0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
4 1
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
0.01 2k
0.01 800 900 1k
0.02
700
0.02
600
0.03
500
0.03
400
0.04
300
0.05
0.04
200
0.05
100
TIME(SECONDS)
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
20) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
203
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40 30
50 40 30
7
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
9
5
TIME(SECONDS)
3k
2k
900 1k
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
21) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
8
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
8*
0.05
0.05
6
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
204
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
0.01 700
0.01 600
0.02
500
0.02
400
0.03
300
0.03
200
0.04
100
0.04
RECLOS SER CONTR ROL EVRC2A A-N6,NT
http p://www.enttecene.co.krr
22) Non N Standardd Curves (11,, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
Figure 7-333. Non Standdard Curvess (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 118)
ENHA ANCED TEC CHNOLOGY Y
205
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
100 90 80 70 60
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
8k 9k 10k 100 90 80 70 60
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : F, H, J, KG CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS
50 40
TIME(SECONDS)
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
23) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
50 40
30
30
20
20
10 9 8 7 6
10 9 8 7 6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.2
F
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
J KG
0.1 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.05
0.05
H
0.04
0.04
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
206
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8k 9k 10k
7k
6k
5k
4k
3k
2k
800 900 1k
700
600
0.01 500
0.01 400
0.02
300
0.02
200
0.03
100
0.03
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7.19. Loss of Phase - Option EVRC2A has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate settings and is an optional element depending on the specification of EVRC2A. If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or two phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker determines Loss of Phase. The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Function [LOSS OF PHASE] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0.30
Range
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates. If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Relays(0-8) [LOSS OF PHASE] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0.30
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip. PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup(xVT) [LOSS OF PHASE] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Pickup(xVT): 0.30
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.30
Step
0.01
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30 × VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay [LOSS OF PHASE] Relays(0-8): OFF Pickup(xVT): 0.30 >Time Delay: 20.00
Range
0.10 ~ 100.00 sec
Default 20.00
Step
0.01 sec
The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
207
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8. MONITORING EVRC2A has Monitoring function for following items and also has functions for user to output Alarm signal or Trip signal. y
DEMAND
y
SYNCHRO CHECK
y
TRIP COUNTER
y
RECLOSER WEAR
y
BATTERY TEST
y
FAULT LOCATOR
y
GAS LOW LOCK – Option
y
EXT’ TRIP & LOCK – Option
y
LIVE LOAD BLOCK – Option
8.1. Demand 8.1.1. Description EVRC2A is programmed to monitor following items to be operated as user sets. y
Phase Current demand value
y
Ground current demand value
y
Negative sequence current demand value
8.1.2. Related Setting Menu 1) Function Setting Select for system to operate when Demand elements were picked up. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Function [DEMAND] >Function: Relays(0-8): Type:
Range OFF OFF THM
OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
Default OFF
Step
OFF : OFF Monitoring TRIP : Generates Trip signal TR&AR : Generate Trip and Alarm signal
208
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
~
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2) Alarm Output Relay Setting Select Relay output for alarm. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Relays(0-8) [DEMAND] Function: >Relays(0-8): Type:
Range OFF OFF THM
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal. 0000 : No Output Relay is selected. 1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.
3) Demand Method Setting Setting for Demand calculation method. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Type [DEMAND] Function: Relays(0-8): >Type:
Range OFF OFF THM
THM, ROL
Default THM
Step
~
THM : Calculated by Thermal Exponential demand. ROL : Calculated Rolling demand.
4) Time constant Setting Setting for 90% Response time in Thermal calculation method. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Time Constant(m) [DEMAND] Relays(0-8): OFF Type: THM >Time Constant(m): 5
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Default 5
Step
~
Enter the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the actual value.
5) Phase demand pickup current setting Setting for Phase demand pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHA PU(A) [DEMAND] Type: THM Time Constant(m): 5 >PHA PU(A): 600
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 600A
Step
1A
Set Phase demand pickup current.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
209
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
6) Ground demand pickup current Setting Setting for Ground demand pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / GND PU(A) [DEMAND] Time Constant(m): 5 PHA PU(A): 600 >GND PU(A): 300
Range
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 300A
Step
1A
Set Ground demand pickup current.
7) Negative sequence demand pickup current Setting Setting for Negative sequence demand pickup current. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / NEQ PU(A) [DEMAND] PHA PU(A): GND PU(A): >NEQ PU(A):
Range 600 300 600
OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Default 600A
Step
Set Negative sequence demand pickup current.
210
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1A
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.2. Synchronism Check (25) EVRC2A provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and frequency. If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close with the exception of automatic reclose for fault. When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check can allow for local/remote close. If EVRC2A is the type of VD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser. The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function [SYNCHROCHECK] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Range
OFF, ALARM
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ALARM, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Relays(0-8) [SYNCHROCHECK] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an Alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max(xVT) [SYNCHROCHECK] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.50
Step
0.01
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check. Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this level.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
211
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min(xVT) [SYNCHROCHECK] Relays(0-8): OFF D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 >L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.85
Step
0.01
Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check. Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this level.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V) [SYNCHROCHECK] D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 >M.V.D(V): 0.10
Range
0.00 ~ 1.25
Default 0.10
Step
0.01
Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages. A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg) [SYNCHROCHECK] L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 M.V.D(V): 0.10 >M.A.D(Deg): 15
Range
0 ~ 100 deg
Default 15
Step
1 deg
Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages. An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz) [SYNCHROCHECK] M.V.D(V): 0.10 M.A.D(Deg): 15 >M.F.D(Hz): 2.00
Range
0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz
Default 2.00
Step
0.01 Hz
Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages. A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase [SYNCHROCHECK] M.A.D(Deg): 15 M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 >Sync Phase: R(AB)
Range
R(AB), S(CB), T(AC)
Default R(AB)
Step
~
Select the synchronism check phase on load side.
212
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.3. Trip Counter 8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation EVRC2A records counter related with System operation. Especially Trip Counter is operated depending on Monitoring function set by user. y
Trip : Records trip operation count
y
Fault : Records Fault count
y
System Restart : Records system restart count MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS [ COUNTER ] 1.TRIP : 00000 2.FAULT : 00000 3.RESTART: 00011
User can confirm in “MAIN MENU/MAINTENANCE/COUNTERS”
8.3.2. Related Setting Menu 1) Function Setting Select for system to operate when Trip Counter reaches Limit value set by user. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Function [TRIP COUNTER] >Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF Limit: 10000
Range
OFF, ALARM
Default OFF
Step
~
OFF : OFF Monitoring ALARM : Generate Alarm signal
2) Alarm Output Relay Setting Select Relay output for alarm. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Relays(0-8) [TRIP COUNTER] Function: OFF >Relays(0-8): OFF Limit: 10000
Range
OFF, 0 ~ 8
Default OFF
Step
1
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal. 0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected. 1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
213
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
3) Limit value Setting Setting for Trip Counter Monitor value. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Limit [TRIP COUNTER] Function: OFF Relays(0-8): OFF >Limit: 10000
Range
1 ~ 20000
Default 10000
Step
1
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter limit value was picked up.
4) Clear value Setting Use to synchronize EVRC2A counter with Recloser Counter. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Counter set [TRIP COUNTER] Relays(0-8): OFF Limit: 10000 >Counter set: 0
Range
0 ~ 10000
Default 0
Step
1
Enters a value for Trip Counter Clear.
5) Stored Value Clear Select “7.Counter” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear the Trip Counter.
214
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.4. Recloser Wear 8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation Maintenance of contact life of Recloser. Manages the contact life calculated from fault current size when faults interrupted. The initial value is 100% MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR [WEAR MONITOR (%)] 1.CONTACT A : 98.70 2.CONTACT B : 98.70 3.CONTACT C : 98.70
User can confirm in “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR” Phase A Wear : Shows phase A contact life. Phase B Wear : Shows phase B contact life. Phase C Wear : Shows phase C contact life.
8.4.2. Related setting menu 1) Function Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Function [RECLOSER WEAR] >Function: ALARM Pickup(%): 20.0 Rated Volt(kV): 15
Range
OFF, ALARM
Default ALARM
Step
~
Select for system to operate when Recloser wear elements were picked up.
2) Pickup Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Pickup(%) [RECLOSER WEAR] Function: ALARM >Pickup(%): 20.0 Rated Volt(kV): 15
Range
0.0 ~ 50.0 %
Default 20.0
Step
0.1 %
Enter Pickup value of contact life.
3) Rated Voltage Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Rated Volt(kV) [RECLOSER WEAR] Function: ALARM Pickup(%): 20.0 >Rated Volt(kV): 15
Range
15, 27, 38 ㎸
Default Note
Step
~
Select rated voltage. NOTE : The rated voltage determines the Recloser type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
215
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
4) Interrupter capacity setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Interrupt(kA) [RECLOSER WEAR] Pickup(%): 20.0 Rated Volt(kV): 15 >Interrupt(kA): 12.5
Range
5.0 ~ 50.0 kA
Default 16
Step
0.1 kA
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
5) Maximum Rated Interruption Number Setting PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / No. Max I [RECLOSER WEAR] Rated Volt(kV): 15 Interrupt(kA): 12.5 >No. Max I: 100
Range
1 ~ 999
Default 100
Step
1
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
6) Clear value Setting Use to synchronize EVRC2A contact wear with Recloser contact wear. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / A Wear Set [RECLOSER WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.0 >B Wear Set: 100.0 >C Wear Set: 100.0
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01 %
Enter a value of Phase A ’s contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / B Wear Set [RECLOSER WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.0 >B Wear Set: 100.0 >C Wear Set: 100.0
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
0.01 %
Enter a value of Phase B ’s contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / C Wear Set [RECLOSER WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.0 >B Wear Set: 100.0 >C Wear Set: 100.0
Range
0.00 ~ 100.00 %
Default 100.00
Step
Enter a value of Phase C ’s contact wear.
216
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
0.01 %
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
7) Stored value Clear Select “8. WEAR MONITOR” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear value. Insert the value set in “PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WEAR / A, B, C Wear” from LCD menu.
8.5. Battery Test PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / BT Time(day) [BATTERY TEST] >BT Time(day): OFF
Range
0(OFF), 1 ~ 7 day
Default OFF
Step
1 day
Select the period for automatically checking the battery status.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
217
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.6. Fault Locator The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance. This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage. For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data is required at least 2 cycles. If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily achieved, but source impedance is not required. Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow. In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful. The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder. Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-1. Faulted distribution system circuit” for example.
(1-m)Z
mZ
IA
IF
VA
RF
L O A D
Figure 8-1. Faulted distribution system circuit The calculated “Fault Location” can be checked on the “FAULT CYCLE” event menu. For more details, refer to “12.1. Waveform Capture”.
218
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
The fault locator settings are as follows : PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Function [FAULT LOCATOR] >Function : OFF Length(km) : 50.0 Z1(RES) : 10.0
Range
OFF, ON
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Feeder Length [FAULT LOCATOR] Function : OFF >Length(km) : 50.0 Z1(RES) : 10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 99.9 km
Default 50.0
Step
0.1 km
Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Resistive [FAULT LOCATOR] Function : OFF Length(km) : 50.0 >Z1(RES) : 10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence impedance, in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Inductive [FAULT LOCATOR] Length(km) : 50 Z1(RES) : 10.0 >Z1(IND) : 10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence impedance, in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Resistive [FAULT Z1(RES) Z1(IND) >Z0(RES)
LOCATOR] : 10.0 : 10.0 : 10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Inductive [FAULT Z1(IND) Z0(RES) >Z0(IND)
LOCATOR] : 10.0 : 10.0 : 10.0
Range
0.1 ~ 6000.0
Default 10.0
Step
0.1
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
219
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
8.7. Gas Low Lock - Option PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / GAS LOW LOCK / Function [GAS LOW LOCK] >Function: DISABLE
Range
DISABLE,ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
If function = ENABLE, EVRC2A can’t be opened or closed on the gas pressure low status (below 0.1bar). If function = DISABLE, EVRC2A can be opened or closed even if it is on the gas pressure low status. NOTE : This function is applies only to Gas Type Recloser.
8.8. EXT’ Trip & Lock - Option This function can make EVRC2A opened and then close lock when the corresponding signal sent from SCADA is received. And EVRC2A can be reset from close lock status by “FI Reset” command. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock / Function [EXT’ Trip & Lock] >Function: DISABLE >USE Inputport: 1 >Reset Method: LOCAL
Range
DISABLE,ENABLE
Default DISABLE
Step
~
If function = ENABLE, EVRC2A will be open and then close locked when the signal from SCADA is received. If function = DISABLE, the function is not activated even if the signal is received.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock / USE Inputport [EXT’ Trip & Lock] >Function: DISABLE >USE Inputport: 1 >Reset Method: LOCAL
Range
1~8
Default 1
Step
1
Set the port to receive the signal from SCADA. As example, if “1” is set, this function is activated or not by the signal value on IN01 port.
220
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock \ Reset Method [EXT’ Trip & Lock] >Function: DISABLE >USE Inputport: 1 >Reset Method: LOCAL
0:LOCAL,1:LO&RE
Range
Default LOCAL
Step
~
LOCAL : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel, the close lock is released. LO&RE : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel or remote “FI Reset” command, the close lock is released.
8.9. Live Load Block – Option When closed, EVRC2A provides the Close Block function operated by whether or not there is voltage live line on the load side. PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Function [Live Load Blocking] >Function: OFF >Pickup(xVT): 0.30 >Time Delay: 1.00
Range
OFF, RECLO, CLOSE, BOTH
Default OFF
Step
~
If function = OFF, the function is not operational. If function = RECLOSE, the function is operated when reclosed after fault occurrence. If function = CLOSE, the function is operated when manually closed locally or remotely. If function = BOTH, the function is operated when reclosed or manually closed.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Pickup(xVT) [Live Load Blocking] >Function: OFF >Pickup(xVT): 0.30 >Time Delay: 1.00
Range
0.10 ~ 0.90
Default 0.30
Step
0.01
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage in load side. As example, if secondary voltage of load side is 100V and a user wants that the close lock is operated when the voltage of load side is over 30V, set 0.3090.30x100V = 30V)
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Time Delay [Live Load Blocking] >Function: OFF >Pickup(xVT): 0.30 >Time Delay: 1.00
Range
0.00~600.00sec
Default 1.00sec
Step
0.01
At open, if the voltage on load side is over the Pickup setting and maintained for this setting time, the close block is operated.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
221
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9. STATUS This menu shows the current status of EVRC2A like below y
OPTO INPUTS
y
RELAY OUTPUTS
y
CLOCK
y
CONTROL TYPE
9.1. OPTO Inputs Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS” to see external input port status.. STATUS / OPTO INPUTS [OPTO INPUTS] Input 1: OPEN Input 2: CLOSE Input 3: OPEN Input 4: OPEN Input 5: OPEN Input 6: OPEN Input 7: OPEN Input 8: CLOSE Door St: CLOSE
Display 8 input port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or “CLOSE” depending on the input signal status. OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted, CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted. Use [▲] [▼] button to see all input port statuses
9.2. Relay Outputs Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / RELAY OUTPUTS” to see external output port status. STATUS / OPTO INPUTS [RELAY OUTPUTS] Output 1: OPEN Output 2: CLOSE Output 3: OPEN Output 4: OPEN Output 5: OPEN Output 6: OPEN Output 7: OPEN Output 8: CLOSE
Display 8 output port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or “CLOSE” depending on the output signal status. OPEN : Shows External Output is de-asserted, CLOSE : Shows External Output is asserted. Use [▲] [▼] button to see all output port statuses
222
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.3. Clock Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CLOCK” to see current time. The “CLOCK” menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version. Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A STATUS / CLOCK Check current time [CURRENT TIME] 2009/11/05 21:02:38
From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A STATUS / CLOCK Check current time [CURRENT TIME] L2009/01/01 09:00:00 G2009/01/01 00:00:00
ⓐ Indicates the local time type’s present time. ⓑ Indicates the GMT time type’s present time.
[CURRENT TIME] L G
ⓐ ⓑ
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
223
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
9.4. Control Type Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CONTROL TYPE” to see EVRC2A information. STATUS / CONTROL TYPE Preset EVRC2A in information is displayed. [CONTROL TYPE] EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXX 03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060 [CONTROL TYPE] EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXⓐ 03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060
EVRC2A information screen consists of 2 screens, first screen shows firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is changed by [▲] [▼] button. NOTE The letter located at `ⓐ’ in the “CONTROL TYPE” screen on the side indicates whether ZCT is installed or not.
[CONTROL TYPE] MPU: 7.00 CPU: 2.00
DSP: 1.00
If the letter located at `ⓐ’ is `X’ then it is a product that was dispatched without ZCT installed(normal mode) while, if the letter located at `ⓐ’ is `S’ then it is a product that was dispatched with ZCT installed(special option) as per user’s request. Depending on whether the product was dispatched with ZCT installed or not, the setting range of the “S.E.F” in the “PICKUP CURRENT” menu and the setting range of the “S.E.F” in the “CLPU-TYPE1” menu will be different.
224
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10. METERING The following values are contained in the metering elements of EVRC2A. y
Current
y
Voltage(Source Side, Load Side)
y
Frequency
y
Synchronism Voltage
y
Power
y
Energy
y
Demand
y
System
y
Harmonics
y
Unbalance NOTE : Unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
225
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1. Metering Elements 10.1.1. Current The following values are contained in the current metering. IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, Lag) IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, Lag) IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, Lag) IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, Lag) ISG : Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, Lag) I2 : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS current (A) You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT” MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT [LINE CURRENT(A)] A: 0 B: 0 C: 0 G: 0 SG: 0 I2: 0
[ZERO SEQ CURRENT] 0A 0.0 Lag
[PHASE A 0 A [PHASE B 0 A
CURRENT] 0.0 Lag CURRENT] 0.0 Lag
[POS SEQ CURRENT] 0A 0.0 Lag [NEQ SEQ CURRENT] 0A 0.0 Lag
[PHASE C 0 A [GROUND 0 A
CURRENT] 0.0 Lag CURRENT] 0.0 Lag
[SENSTV CURRENT] 0 A 0.0 Lag
Display measured values of current and current phase per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information of current.
226
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.2. Voltage(Souce Side, Load Side) The following values are contained in the voltage metering. A-N : Displays the measured A-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) B-N : Displays the measured B-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) C-N : Displays the measured C-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) A-B : Displays the measured A-B RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) B-C : Displays the measured B-C RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) C-A : Displays the measured C-A RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) AVERAGE PHASE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS phase voltage(㎸) AVERAGE LINE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS line voltage(㎸) POS SEQ : Displays the calculated positive sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) NEG SEQ : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag) ZERO SEQ : Displays the calculated zero sequence RMS voltage and phasor (㎸, Lag) You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE” MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE [VOLTAGE (kV)] AN: 0.00 AB: 0.00 BN: 0.00 BC: 0.00 CN: 0.00 CA: 0.00
[ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE] 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[AVERAGE PHASE] VOLTAGE --> 0.00 [AVERAGE LINE] VOLTAGE --> 0.00
[POS SEQ VOLTAGE] 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag [NEG SEQ VOLTAGE] 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[PHASE 0.00 [PHASE 0.00
A-N kV B-N kV
VOLTAGE] 0.0 Lag VOLTAGE] 0.0 Lag
[PHASE 0.00 [LINE 0.00
C-N kV A-B kV
VOLTAGE] 0.0 Lag VOLTAGE] 0.0 Lag
[LINE 0.00 [LINE 0.00
B-C kV C-A kV
VOLTAGE] 0.0 Lag VOLTAGE] 0.0 Lag
Display measured values of voltage and voltage phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information of voltage.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
227
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.3. Frequency The following values are contained in the frequency metering. y
Frequency(㎐)
y
Frequency decay rate(㎐/Sec)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY” MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY [FREQUENCY (Hz)] 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz/Sec
Frequency Display
10.1.4. Synchro Voltage The following values are contained in the synchronism voltage metering. y
Synchro Voltage(㎸)
y
Synchro Phasor(deg°)
y
Synchro Frequency(㎐)
y
Synchrocheck delta(Phasor, voltage, frequency)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE” MAIN MENU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE [SYNCHRO VOLTAGE] R:15.59 kV 0.0 Lag S:15.59 kV 120.0 Lag T:15.59 kV 240.0 Lag
Display measured values of Synchronism Voltage, Frequency and Synchronism Delta. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information of Synchronism voltage. NOTE : The “SYNCHRO VOLTAGE” menu screen can vary
[SYNCHRO FREQUENCY] 50.00 Hz
according to the EVRC2A version.
[SYNCHRO DELTA] A: 0.09 kV 0.0 Deg B:15.59 kV 59.9 Deg C:15.59 kV 359.9 Deg
[SYNCHRO DELTA] 50.00 Hz
228
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.5. Power The following values are contained in the power metering. y
Real power(MW)
y
Reactive power(Mvar)
y
Apparent power(MVA)
y
Power factor(%)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER” MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER [REAL POWER (MW)] Pa: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pc: 0.00
[REACTIVE POW(MVAR)] Pa: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pc: 0.00
[APPARENT POW(MWA)] Pa: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pc: 0.00
[POWER FACTOR] Pa: 0.0 Pb: 0.0 P3: 0.0 Pc: 0.0
Display measured values of power and power factor per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information of power.
10.1.6. Energy The following values are contained in the energy metering. y
Positive watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
y
Negative watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
y
Positive varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
y
negative varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
The updated rate of the energy meters is based on the “Time Constant” setting “MAIN MENU / SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND” The meters will update every 1/15 of the Demand Constant. For example : if the Demand Constant is set to 15 minutes, the energy meters will update every 1 minute (15min × 1/15 = 1 min) The watt-hour and VAR-hour meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / ENERGY”. The “SD(start date)” on LCD indicates the time when the watt-hour and VAR-hour meters are reset.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
229
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY” MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY [POSITIVE W/H(MWh)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[POSITIVE V/H(MVar)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[NEGATIVE W/H(MWh)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[NEGATIVE V/H(MVar)] Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
Display energy. Use [▲] [▼] button to check energy information.
10.1.7. Demand The following values are contained in the demand metering. Actual demand & maximum demand with Value (Current, Real power, Reactive power) and Date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second) During each demand value, the EVRC2A also captures and stores maximum values for the measurements listed below. It functions as a standard maximum meter. When a new maximum value is determined, the old value is replaced. A time stamp in the following format (Date: Year/Month/Day and Time: Hour:Minute,Second), is placed with the latest maximum values. The Max demand meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / MAX DEMAND”
230
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / DEMEND” MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND [PHASE A CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE B CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE SG CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE G CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE C CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE I2 CURRENT] DEMAND: 0 A MAX : 0 A 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE A REAL POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE B REAL POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW 10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-A REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar 10/01/01 00:00:00
[3P REAL POWER (MW)] DEMAND: 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE C REAL POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW 10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-B REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar 10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-C REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar 10/01/01 00:00:00
[3P REACTIVE POWER] DEMAND: 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar 10/01/01 00:00:00
[DEMAND CURRENT A: 0 B: C: 0 G: SG: 0 I2:
(A)] 0 0 0
Demand Current, Real power and Reactive power Display. Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
231
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.8. System The following values are contained in the system metering. y
Board power(±12, +5V)
y
Temperature(℃)
y
Battery voltage(V)
y
Gas pressure(Bar) NOTE : According to recloser type, there may be no gas pressure measurement.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYSTEM” MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM [ SYSTEM METER] +12:12.35 –12:-12.38 +5 : 5.12 TMP:27.58 BAT:27.44 GAS: 0.00
System metering display.
10.1.9. Unbalance The following values are contained in the unbalance metering. y
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) – Source Side
y
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) – Load Side
y
Current unbalance(I2/I1)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / UNBALANCE” MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM [UNBALANCE- %] SOURCE-VOLT: 0 LOAD-VOLT: 0 CURRENT: 0
Unbalance metering display.
NOTE : This menu is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
232
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.1.10. Harmonics The following values are contained in harmonics metering. y y y y
1st~7th Harmonic of Current 1st~7th Harmonic of Voltage THD of Current THD of Voltage
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS” MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS [HARMONICS] >1.THD >2.Current-A >3.Current-B >4.Current-C >5.Voltage-A >6.Voltage-B >7.Voltage-C
Current and Voltage Harmonics display.
THD You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD”. MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD [Total Har’ Dis’(%)] >Ia : 0 Va : 0 >Ib : 0 Vb : 0 >Ic : 0 Vc : 0
This menu is to display the total harmonic distortion of current and voltage.
Current-A You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A”. MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic of current through phase A. Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
233
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Current-B(C) The same Menu as “Current-A” function. You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-B(C)”.
Voltage-A You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-A”. MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic and THD of voltage in phase A. Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.
Voltage -B(C) The same Menu as “Voltage-A” function. You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-B(C)”.
234
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
10.2. Accuracy The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental components only. Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy(1/2) Measurements
Parameters
Unit
Accuracy
Range
A
±1% of 2×CT
20×CT
㎸
±1%
–
Phase A RMS Current Phase B RMS Current CURRENT
Phase C RMS Current Phase G RMS Current Phase SEF RMS Current A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage
VOLTAGE
C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage R–N (R–S) RMS Voltage S–N (S–T) RMS Voltage* T–N (T–R) RMS Voltage*
SYMMETRICAL
I1, I2, 3I0
A
±1% of 2×CT
COMPONENTS
V1, V2, 3V0
㎸
±1%
Rate
±0.02
–1.000 to 1.000
MW
±2%
–32.000 to 32.000
MVar
±2%
–32.000 to 32.000
MVA
±2%
–32.000 to 32.000
MWH
±2%
–32000 to 32000
MVarH
±2%
–32000 to 32000
A
±2%
A/B/C, 3Φ Real Power
MW
±2%
A/B/C, 3Φ Reactive Power
MVar
±2%
POWER FACTOR
3ΦREAL POWER
Phase A, B, C 3Φ Phase Phase A, B, C 3Φ Phase
3ΦREACTIVE
Phase A, B, C
POWER
3Φ Phase
3ΦAPPARENT
Phase A, B, C
POWER
3Φ Phase
WATT-HOURS
VAR-HOURS
Phase A, B, C 3Φ Phase Phase A, B, C 3Φ Phase Phase A/B/C/RG Current
DEMAND
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
–
–
235
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy(2/2) Measurements FREQUENCY
Parameters A-N (A-B) Source Voltage R-N (R-S) Load Voltage
Unit
Accuracy
Range
㎐
±0.02
40.00~70.00
±1%
0% to 100%
±1%
0% to 100%
1st~7th Harmonic of Current st
HARMONICS
UNBALANCE
th
1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage THD of Current
–
±3%
0% to 100%
THD of Voltage
±3%
0% to 100%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side
±2%
0% to 999%
±2%
0% to 999%
±2%
0% to 999%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side Current unbalance(I2/I1)
%
If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.
236
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
11. MAINTENANCE EVRC2A has maintenance function for following items. y
COUNTERS
y
WEAR MONITOR
y
OUTPUT RELAY TEST
y
POWER QUALITY - Option
11.1. Counters EVRC2A records counter related with system operation. The recorded counter items are below. In order to check counter information, go to “MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS”. For more detail information, refer to “8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation”. y
Trip
y
Fault
y
System Restart
11.2. Wear Monitor EVRC2A displays the each phase’s contact wear of the recloser. In order to check information of the recloser’s contact wear, go to “MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR”, For more detail information, refer to “8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
237
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
11.3. Output Relay Test EVRC2A is capable to perform the output test of the relay output ports(1~8). For the output test, go to “MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST” menu. MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST ① [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Select output signal at ① for testing. Press [ENT] button and then ② is shown. Press [FUN] button at ② and then ③ is shown. The output signal has
② [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press : Start Press : Cancel
③
been “asserted” for 2 sec. If the test is completed, the message, “END TESTING”, is shown and then back to the previous menu. If the [ESC] button is press at ②, ④ is shown and the output test is canceled.
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST] SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press : Start TESTING
④ [OUTPUT RELAY TEST] SELECT RELAY :RLY 1 Press : Start TEST Canceled
238
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
11.4. Power Quality - Option 11.4.1. Power Quality Explanation EVRC2A records the related number of times and duration when the outage or sag/swell/unbalance occurs. Especially Supply Outage and Power Quality counter are operated depending on power quality function set in “SYSTEM SETUP” menu. User can confirm in “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/POWER QUALITY”. MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / POWER QUALITY [SUPPLY OUTAGE] T-Time T-Cnt S: ① ② L: ③ ④ [SUPPLY OUTAGE] T-Time T-Cnt S: 0000/00/00 0000 L: 0000/00/00 0000 [PQ COUNT] SAG SWELL A Phase: ⑤ ⑧ B Phase: ⑥ ⑨ C Phase: ⑦ ⑩ [PQ COUNT] SAG A Phase: 31012 B Phase: 31011 C Phase: 31029
SWELL 31003 31002 31023
[PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE SOURCE-VOLT : ⑪ LOAD-VOLT : ⑫ CURRENT : ⑬ [PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE SOURCE-VOLT : 000 LOAD-VOLT : 000 CURRENT : 000
① It indicates the time of outage on a power source side. The time of outage is displayed as hour/minute/second. ② It indicates the number of times of outage on a power source side. ③ It indicates the time of outage on a load side. The time of outage is displayed as hour/minute/second. ④ It indicates the number of outage on a load side. ⑤⑥⑦ They indicate the numbers of sag on A,B,C phase. ⑧⑨⑩ They indicate the numbers of swell on A,B,C phase. ⑪ It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a source side. ⑫ It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a load side. ⑬ It indicates the number of current unbalance. NOTE : The number of times and the hour do not increase during the outage if the power of EVRC2A is off. The number of times and the hour of outage will be recorded by the end of outage. NOTE : These counter for unbalance are supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
239
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
11.4.2. Related Setting Menu 1) Function Setting For more details, please refer to “6.10 Power Quality-Option”. 2) Stored Value Clear Select “10. P-Quality Count” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear the Supply Outage Counter and Power Quality Counter.
240
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12. EVENT RECORDER EVRC2A has recording function for following items. y
FAULT CYCLE WAVEFORM CAPTURE
y
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER
y
LOAD PROFILE
y
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER
y
FAULT TRIP - Option
y
POWER QUALITY - Option
12.1. Waveform Capture In case of Fault, Waveform Capture records 32 Data of 15-Cycle with 16-Smple per 1 Cycle resolution. Fault cycle summary is displayed on LCD screen Captured fault waveforms can be showed by the interface software.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
241
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE Ⓐ [NO-①] ② IA: ③ IB: ③ IC: ③ IG: ③ ④10/01/01 19:51:58
Ⓑ [NO-①] Locate: --⑤ IS: ③ IQ: ③ ④10/01/01 19:51:58
Ex>
Move to ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE” to see Fault cycle summary y
To see previous value, press [▲] key.
y
To see next value, press [▼] key.
On screen Ⓐ use [◀] or [▶] key to see Ⓐ, Ⓑ screen in term. ① Fault No: There are 32 events are recorded and the latest event is displayed in advance. ② Fault Type
[NO-01] Fault Pickup IA: 0 IB: 0 IC: 0 IG: 0 10/01/01 19:51:58
[NO-01] Locate: --IS: 0 IQ: 0 10/01/01 19:51:58
③
-
Fault Pickup
-
27: Under Voltage Trip
-
59: Over Voltage Trip
-
81: Under Frequency Trip
-
A, B, C, G: Fault phase shows LED ON.
-
S: Sensitive Earth Fault
-
Q: Negative Sequence Fault
-
O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip, Loss of Phase etc.)
Each phase fault current unit : Ampere(A)
④ Event occurred time : Year/Month/Day(or Month/Day/Year) Hour: Minute: Second ⑤ Fault Location Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ON. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “8.6. Fault Locator”.
242
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.1.1. Trigger Source y
Occurred Protection element pickup
y
Occurred Fault trip command active
Depending on pickup size, if interval between pickup and trip is within 15 cycles including prefault cycles(4 cycles), then record pickup cycles. But if the interval between pickup and trip are not within 15 cycles, then record pickup cycles and trip cycles. These operations are very useful to examine.
12.1.2. Data Channels Stores following data : y
5 currents : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef
y
3 voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) : not passed digital-filter
y
85 logic input states
y
8Ch output relays
y
8Ch Inputs
12.1.3. Sample Rate Captures one period of 16 sampling per cycle.
12.1.4. Storage capacity The capacity of storage is last 32 events of 15cycles.
12.1.5. Related Setting Menu 1) ON/OFF Setting Fault Cycle waveform capture function can be set ON/OFF by user. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Fault Cycle [EVENT RECORDER] >Fault Cycle: ON Len' of Pre F: 4 Load Profile: ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
ON : Record fault cycle waveform. OFF : No record of fault cycle waveform.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
243
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
2) Pre-fault length Setting User sets the length of pre-fault before Trigger. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Len' of Pre F [EVENT RECORDER] Fault Cycle: ON >Len' of Pre F: 4 Load Profile: ON
0 ~ 14
Range
Default 4
Step
1
Usually sets 4 cycles as default.
3) Stored Value Clear Select “1. FAULT CYCLE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / REALY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear the stored value.
12.1.6. Interface software Interface software shows Data and captured waveform (below)
Figure 12-1. Data and captured waveform showed by Interface Software
244
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.2. System Event Recorder Record changes of system status up to 2048 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted. MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS [NO-0001] SLEEP MODE STATUS : LO/DEASSERT DATE : 10/01/22 TIME : 19:51:58:387
Confirm in ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS”
12.2.1. Trigger Source y
Protection Element
y
52A Contact
y
Sequence status
y
Front panel control
y
AC supply
y
External control
y
Fail operation
y y y y
External input status System alarm etc. V1(Source), V2(Load) Power Quality detect NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to “Appendix C. EVENT TEXT & DESCRIPTION”.
12.2.2. Trigger Time Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
12.2.3. Trigger type Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
12.2.4. Storage Capacity Stores last 2048 events.
12.2.5. Related Setting Menu System automatically maintains system event recorder. User can clear only stored events. 1) Stored Value Clear Select “2.SYSTEM STATUS” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
245
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.2.6. Interface software Interface software shows system status events.
Figure 12-2. System Status Events showed by Interface Software
246
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.3. Load Profile Record the Demand value when reaches in setting time (5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute). Load profile has 5120 Banks that can store values of 213 days if setting time is 60minute. LOAD PROFILE ① CURRENT (A) [0001] A: 0 B: 0 C: 0 G: 0 10/01/22 21:45:00
② REAL POW(MW) [0001] A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 3P: 0 10/01/22 21:45:00
Confirm in ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / LOAD PROFILE” y
To see previous value, press [▲] key.
y
To see next value, press [▼] key.
y
On screen ①, use [◀] or [▶] key to see ①, ②, ③, ④ screen in term.
③ REAC POW(Mvar)[0001] A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 3P: 0 10/01/22 21:45:00
④ PF&ENERGY-3P [0001] P-F(%) : 0.0 MWh: 0.0 MVh: 0.0 10/01/22 21:45:00
12.3.1. Trigger Source y
Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
y
Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
y
Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
y
Demand Power Factor( 3ф)
y
Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)
12.3.2. Trigger Time y
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 Minute
12.3.3. Storage Capacity y
Stores 5120 events
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
247
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.3.4. Related Setting Menu 1) ON/OFF Setting Load Profile can be set ON/OFF by user. PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile [EVENT RECORDER] Fault Cycle: ON Len' of Pre F: 4 >Load Profile: ON
Range
OFF, ON
Default ON
Step
~
ON : Records load profile. OFF : No record of load profile.
2) Recording time interval setting PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m) [EVENT RECORDER] Len' of Pre F: 4 Load Profile: ON >L.P save time(m):15
Range
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Default 15
Step
~
Sets the interval time between Records.
12.3.5. Stored value Clear Select “3. LOAD PROFILE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.
248
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.3.6. Interface software Interface software shows load profile data.
Figure 12-3. Load Profile Data showed by Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
249
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder Record diagnostic events up to 512 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted. MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC [NO-001] GAS HIGH STATUS : LO/DEASSERT DATE : 10/01/22 TIME : 19:51:58:387
Confirm in ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC”
12.4.1. Trigger Source y
SYSTEM POWER : AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V
y
A/D Conversion : A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2
y
POWER DOWN MODE
y
GAS STATUS etc
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status. y NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to “Appendix C. EVENT TEXT & DESCRIPTION”.
12.4.2. Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle
12.4.3. Trigger type Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
12.4.4. Storage Capacity Stores last 512 events.
12.4.5. Related Setting Menu System automatically maintains Diagnostic event recorder. User can clear only stored events. 1) Stored Value Clear Select “4.DIAGNOSTIC” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.
250
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.4.6. Interface software Interface software shows Diagnostic events.
Figure 12-4. Diagnostic Events showed by Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
251
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Option When fault trip occurs, fault time and fault current of each phase are recorded. MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP Confirm in “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP”.
Ⓐ [①/②] ③ IA: ④ IB: ④ IC: ④ IG: ④ ⑤10/01/01 00:00:00
y
To see previous value, press [▲] key.
y
To see next value, press [▼] key.
On screen Ⓐ use [◀] or [▶] key to see Ⓐ, Ⓑ screen in term.
Ⓑ [①/②] IS: ④ IQ: ④ ⑤10/01/01
③
① Display the order of the fault trip occurrence and events from the most recent fault to the oldest fault. Total 512 events can be stored.
00:00:00
② Display fault sequence(shot counter). Ex>
③ Display fault type.
[001/1] IA: 0 IC: 0 10/01/01
ABCG IB: 0 IG: 0 00:00:00
[001/1] IS: 0 IQ: 0 10/01/01
ABCG
④ Display current of each phase when fault occurs. ⑤ Display fault time.
00:00:00
12.5.1. Trigger Source y
y
252
Target elements -
A: A Phase Overcurrent Trip
-
B: B phase Overcurrent Trip
-
C: C phase Overcurrent Trip
-
G: G phase Overcurrent Trip
-
S: Sensitive Earth Overcurrent Trip
-
Q: Negative Sequence Overcurrent Trip
-
27: Under Voltage Trip
-
59: Over Voltage Trip
-
81: Under Frequency Trip
-
O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip, Loss of Phase etc.)
fault current[A]: A , B, C and G phase currents, SEF current, Negative Sequence current
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.5.2. Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle
12.5.3. Storage Capacity Stores last 512 events.
12.5.4. Related Setting Menu System automatically maintains fault trip event recorder. User can clear only stored events. 1) Stored Value Clear Select “9. Fault Trip” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.
12.5.5. Interface software Interface software shows Fault Trip events.
Figure 12-5. Fault Trip Events showed by Interface Software
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
253
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder - Option EVRC2A always monitors the voltage on both power source side and load side, and records the data of power outage in order to analyze the cause when the outage is detected on either side. When the outage is detected, EVRC2A records the outage time and duration. Besides, it also records the occurrence time of sag/swell event and unbalance event. Power Quality event can be viewed at “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER QUALITY” MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER QUALITY ① Displays the order of the event occurrence and events from the most recent event to the oldest event. Total 512 events can be stored. [NO-001] OUTAGE-S OT: 0000 h 00 m 00 s DATE : 10/01/01 TIME : 00:00:00:000 [NO-①] OT: ③ DATE : ④ TIME : ⑤
②
② Displays the event type and detect value. -
OUTAGE-S : power supply side outage
-
OUTAGE-L : load side outage
-
SAG-A(B,C) : A(B,C) phase sag.
-
SWL-A(B,C) : A(B,C) phase swell.
-
UBL-SV : Voltage Unbalance on source side
-
UBL-LV : Voltage Unbalance on load side
-
UBC : Current Unbalance
③ Displays the duration of outage as in hour/ minute/second and cycle message added after duration. ④ Displays the time of outage, sag, swell or unbalance detected. NOTE : It does not record outage or sag/swell event if the power of EVRC2A was off during the outage.
254
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
12.6.1. Trigger Source y
y
Target elements -
Source Outage
-
Load Outage
-
Sag/Swell
-
Voltage Unbalance
-
Current Unbalance
Monitoring elements - Source side Voltage - Load side Voltage - Current
12.6.2. Trigger Time Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle
12.6.3. Storage Capacity Stores last 512 events.
12.6.4. Related Setting Menu 1) Function and Outage duration Settings Refer to menu, “11.4.2 Related Setting Menu.” 2) Stored Value Clear System automatically maintains power quality event recorder. User can clear only stored events. Select “11. P-Quality Event” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear.
12.6.5. Interface software All the supply outage events can be viewed at interface software.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
255
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Figure 12-6. Power Quality Events showed by Interface Software
256
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13. INSTALLATION 13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch User Interface Door User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the handle. Control Power Switch After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power, right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control. AC Power Outlet For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 13-5. Inner Structure”
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
257
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover
Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover Outer Cover It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle. The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm. Air Vent To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side covered with Outer Cover.
258
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan y
EVRC2A has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type.
y
Small size is available for EVR1, EVR2, Large size is available for EVR3.
y
Large size is able to make “User available Space” larger, the space unit is referred to “Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
259
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
y
Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.
y
EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5㎸) / EVR2 (27㎸) / EVR3 (38㎸)
y
For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated.
y
Weight of EVRC2A small size is 85㎏ and large size is 90㎏.
y
EVRC2A should be fixed top and bottom with 16㎜(5/8") Bolt.
y
There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning hardware.
y
The diameter of the hole is 22㎜(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series can be extended.
260
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram y
After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.
y
Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter.
y
Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from EVRC2A Earth Terminal must be connected to the ground.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
261
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.5. Inner Structure
Figure 13-5. Inner Structure Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker) Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac(or 110Vac – option). Heater Optional Heater is 40W Battery Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement. Fuse TF1, TF2, TF3 are for circuit protection, refers to (see “13.20. Fuse”) Terminal Block Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user. User Available Space Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to “Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”.
262
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions y
Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
y
On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
y
Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6㎜ (4”) to 177.8㎜ (7”)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
263
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.7. User-Available DC Power Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power Voltage Rating
Voltage Range
Maximum Power output
Positions
24Vdc
20∼25Vdc
40W Continuous
Side Panel CN5
15Vdc
14.0∼15.5Vdc
60W 60second
(1-VCC/+)
12Vdc
11.0∼12.5Vdc
Short 1second
(2-AGND/-)
Standard Voltage : 12Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating y
30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is referred to “Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses”
y
Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) CN5 connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12.
y
To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3 “Figure 13-31. ANALOG BOARD”, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the voltage rating due to disassembly.
y
When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.
264
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses
Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses y
Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block.
y
Standard AC Power is 220Vac(Optional AC Power is 110Vac).
y
AC Power input terminal 1, 2 are connected from Receptacle to Terminal block. Terminal 3 is the ground.
y
Terminal 4, 5 are for connecting additional AC Power. Terminal 4 is connected with TF3 for protection, terminal 5 is in series with AC Power
y
On TF3 Fuse, AC Power Outlet is connected with 40W Heater. Reference for branching.
y
In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire, green wired line is for the ground.
y
Terminal 6, 7, 8 are spare for Recloser 52 contact.
y
Terminal 9, 10 are for User Available Terminal block. In need of more terminals, use User Available Space.
52 Contact Auxiliary Specs Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
265
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram – VD Type
Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type y
Wiring diagram of EVRC2A standard.
y
CN1 has different system wirings depending on User system. In “Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type”, CN1 is marked as Earthing System. For non-Earthing system, refer to “Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram”
y
CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. “Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type” is VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) type and “Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type” is VT type.
y
VT type is standard and VD type is for optional. VD type and VT type are not exchangeable.
266
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.10. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type
Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type y
“Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type” is wiring diagram of VT type of which Voltage Input is optional.
y
CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. For wiring, refer to “Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram”
y
VD type and VT type are not exchangeable. VT type is standard and VD type is optional.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
267
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.11. Side Panel Current Inputs IA,IB,IC,IN,SEF CN2 Voltage Inputs VA,VB,VC, VR,VS, VT CN3 AC24V IN Relay Module AC Power Input CN4 BATT` IN Relay Module DC Power Input CN5 POWER OUT - Option User-Available DC Voltage Source CN6 CONTROL Recloser Open, Close CN7 UPS Monitors and controls Close and Trip Power CN8 RECLOSER STATUS Open, Close, Lock, Pressure CN9 CN10 OUTPUTS and INPUTS - Option OUT1~OUT5(A Contact), OUT6~OUT7(B Contact) OUT8(ALARM) IN01~IN08 PORT2 - Option SERIAL RS232 PORT3 - Option SERIAL RS485/422 PORT4 - Option ETHERNET NOTE : 1) I/O Terminal (CN10, CN9) has functions to control basic operation of Recloser and can be connected with SCADA System for use. 2) Remove the coating of cable length of 8㎜ (0.315"). Side panel connector for user should be connected to Wire size AWG24 to 12
268
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Figure 13-10. Side Panel
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram Current IG is connected with Side Panel IG(A07,A08)
in
Earthing
System.
SEF(A09,A10) should be connected, so called “JUMPER” IG Input Current Range y
0.5A Nominal
y
2A continuous
y
25A 1 second
y
Burden : 0.19VA(0.5A)
Current IG should be connected with SEF(A09,A10) of Side Panel in. Non Earthing System. IG(A07,A08) should be connected to each other. SEF Input Current Range y
0.05A Nominal
y
0.16A Continuous
y
0.6A 1 second
y
Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation” CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
269
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.13. VD Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-12. VD Wiring Diagram y
VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures Voltage with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser.
y
VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.
y
Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
y
Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class
y
Option RVD 15㎸, 27㎸ Class
270
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.14. VT Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram y
VD(CVD or RVD) Type can not be used when VT(Voltage Transformer) Type was selected.
y
VT wiring should match Current Inputs.
y
Voltage Inputs VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT Input Voltage Range : Vphase-Vcom Continuous < 300V Burden : 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
271
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.15. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation y
For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
y
“Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and Recloser.
y
If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and VD(CVD or RVD) wiring in side panel to be matched.
y
272
EVR Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.16. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin
Function
Pin
Function
A
C.T Phase C
a
52 common(Auxiliary)
B
C.T Phase B
b
52b(Auxiliary)
C
C.T Phase A
c
52a(Auxiliary)
D
C.T Common(G)
d
Close and Trip Coil Common
E
VD Source Phase C
e
Close and Trip Coil Common
F
VD Source Phase B
f
Close and Trip Coil Common
G
VD Source Phase A
g
Close Coil
H
VD Load side Phase T
h
Close Coil
J
VD Load side Phase S
j
Close Coil
K
VD Load side Phase R
k
not connected
L
Pressure Sensor Output(controller input)
m
Trip Coil
M
not connected
n
not connected
N
Pressure Sensor Power AGND
p
Trip Coil
P
Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
r
Trip Coil
R
Cable shield and Ground
s
not connected
S
not connected
T
Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
U
Recloser Status Common(24Vdc)
V
Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip)
W
Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
X
not connected
Z
not connected
y
Control EVRC2A Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female)
y
Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male)
y
Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)
y
Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
273
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Figure 13-15. Control Receptacle “Figure 13-15. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control EVRC2A.
274
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.17. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling y
Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
y
For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position. Following notices are suggested. Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing. Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to complete connection. Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control Cable assembling
Figure 13-16. Recloser Receptacle
Figure 13-17. Control Cable
13.18. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions Pin
Function
A
AC Power Input
B
AC Power Input (Neutral)
C
not connected
Standard Input Voltage of Control EVRC2A is 220Vac(110Vac – option).
Figure 13-18. Power Receptacle
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
275
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.19. AC Power Cable TYPE : MS22-2S(Female) Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236") A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase) B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral) C PIN : not connected
13.20. Fuses Table 13-4. Fuses Positions
Terminal Block TF1
Terminal Block TF2
Terminal Block TF3 Inside Relay Module F1 (Analog board) Inside Relay Module F2 (Analog board) Inside Relay Module F3 (Analog board) Inside Relay Module F4 (Analog board)
276
Rating /
Dimensions
Purpose
7A/220Vac
0.25×1.25"
Input Line of Transformer in UPS
15A/110Vac
(6.385×31.75)㎜
3A/220Vac
0.25"×1.25"
6A/110Vac
(6.385×31.75)㎜
Control EVRC2A AC Power.
0.25"×1.25"
AC Power outlet and Heater
External AC - Power Input
10A
1A
1A
2A
5A
(6.385×31.75)㎜ 0.197"×0.787" (5×20)㎜ 0.197"×0.787" (5×20)㎜ 0.197"×0.787" (5×20)㎜ 0.197"×0.787" (5×20)㎜
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Module AC Power Input Line of Transformer in
User Available AC Power Trip Control
Close Control
Relay Module Power
User-Available DC Power
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.21. Battery and Control run time Table 13-5. Battery Specs Nominal capacity
24V/17A (12V×2pcs)
Service life Time
5 years
Battery Connector(CN11)
Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time
40hours
Recharge Time
SOC: ~80%/ 15hours
NOTE : Battery capacity can be changed by request of a user. y
Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series.
y
Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time, turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector.
y
The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of +20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient temperature.
y
The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 13-20. Open
Figure 13-19. Battery
Circuit Voltage”
y
Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery voltage. If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is 0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.
y
24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through NFB1(Battery Switch). Relay Module supplies through CN4 Connector in Side Panel and UPS Module supplies through P2 Connector of UPS Module.
Figure 13-20. Open Circuit Voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
277
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.22. Charge Circuit Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to prevent over-recharge. Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has. Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power switch) before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10Ω in series with CD Ammeter. Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(±0.5V) Charge Current : 300mAdc(±50mAdc) NOTE : The battery charger is fully temperature compensated. Battery charger capacity can be changed by request of a user.
13.23. Battery Change Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver. For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake. For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire later. Reference “Figure 13-19. Battery”
13.24. Battery Protection Battery protection is to protect the battery from over-discharge by disconnecting the battery from the control circuit when AC power is lost and before the battery is completely discharged. CPU measures the battery voltage and when the battery is below 21 volts, timer is operated and after 10 minutes, Latch Relay is set to disconnect the battery circuit. On Power Down status, if the external power is re-supplied or the Power Switch is changed from OFF to ON, Control Module is operated as normal. When AC Power is not supplied, in order to operate it by Power Switch, OFF for 5 seconds and turn it ON. When it is turned ON without Battery, it is Power downed after 10 minutes.
278
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.25. Communications 1) RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2 Table 13-6. RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2 Pin
Serial Port1
Serial Port2
Definition
1
N/C
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
2
RXD
RXD
Receive Data
3
TXD
TXD
Transmit Data
4
N/C
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
5
GND
GND
Ground
6
N/C
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
N/C
RTS
Request To Send
8
N/C
CTS
Clear To Send
9
N/C
N/C
No Connection
Positions
User Interface Panel(Male)
Side Panel (Male)
Cable
CC201
CC201,202,203
Purposes
Maintenance
DNP Figure 13-21. RS232 Port
2) RS232/485 Pin Functions for Port3
Figure 13-22. Port 3
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
279
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 13-7. PORT3(RS-232/RS485) Pin Description Pin(RS-232)
Signal
Description
Pin(RS-485)
Description
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
1
RS485+
2
RXD
Receive Data(IN)
2
RS485-
3
TXD
Transmit Data(OUT)
3
SG (Cable Shield)
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready(OUT)
4
485 ON
5
GND
Ground
5
485 ON
6
DSR
Data Set Ready(IN)
7
RTS
Request To Send(OUT)
8
CTS
Clear To Send(IN)
9
N/C
No Connection
※. Note) ① PORT3 provides RS-485 communication and uses Digital power and insulated power of CPU Part for surge protection. Each terminal is Anti-Over-voltage.
② To minimize the noise of communication line, Terminal Resistor is used in the both end of the line and Twisted Shied Cable is advisable for connecting cable. ③ In order to use RS-485, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 Port should be connected. 3) RJ-45 Pin Functions for Port4 Table 13-8. RJ-45Pin Functions for Port4 Pin
Port4
Pin
Port4
1
TX+
6
N/C
2
TX-
7
N/C
3
RX+
8
N/C
4
RX-
Purpose IEC60870-5-104
5
N/C
280
Figure 13-23. RJ-45 Port
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.26. Communication Cables 1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer
Figure 13-24. Cable CC201 (connect to computer) 2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-25. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.) 3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-26. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
281
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
13.27. Hardware Block Diagram
Figure 13-27. Hardware Block Diagram
282
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
http://www.entecene.co.kr
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
Figure 13-28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits CC
Close Coil
TC
Trip Coil
MC
Magnetic Contactor
C
Capacitor
IGBT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
F
Fuse
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
y
Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1, C2, C3 in UPS module.
y
C1 is used for Trip power, C2, C3 are used for Close power.
y
Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is “ON”. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.
y
F1, F2 are Fuses to protect IGBT from MC damage. These are on Analog Board.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
283
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close
Figure 13-29. UPS Module Block Diagram y
UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.
y
Trip and Close Capacitor are individually located and do not affect to each other during Trip and Close.
y
UPS Module runs by 120Vac Power or by Backup Battery.
y
Transformer in EVRC2A connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac.
y
Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs over 20Vdc.
284
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.30. Main Board
Figure 13-30. MAIN BOARD Indicates Firmware Upgrade Port, RTC(Real Time Clock), and main parts location. Also indicates backup battery type.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
285
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.31. Analog Board
Figure 13-31. ANALOG BOARD y
JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connecter, defining User Available DC Power Output Rating.
y
F1, F2 are use to protect IGBT for Close and Trip.
y
F3 is for Relay Module protection.
y
JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connectors and define User Available DC Power rating.
286
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram y
CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
y
The capacity of CVD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
287
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram y
CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
y
The resistance of RVD is 100MΩ, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
288
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) Table 13-9. Current Transformer (CT) Description
Pin
Function
A
C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard)
B
C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5Ω
C
C.T Phase A
D
C.T Common(G)
13.35. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) Table 13-10. Capacitor Voltage Divider (VD) Description
Pin
Function
E
CVD Source Phase C
EVR RECLOSER
F
CVD Source Phase B
1) Pin R is connected to Ground.
G
CVD Source Phase A
2) CVD Capacitance : 20㎊
H
CVD Load side Phase T
3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between
J
CVD Load side Phase S
K
CVD Load side Phase R
R
Cable shield and Ground
EPR RECLOSER
E
RVD Source Phase C
1) Pin R is connected to Ground.
F
RVD Source Phase B
2) RVD Resistance : 10MΩ
G
RVD Source Phase A
3) For RVD Protection, MOV is connected between
H
CVD Load side Phase T
Phase and Ground.
J
CVD Load side Phase S
For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC
K
CVD Load side Phase R
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.
R
Cable shield and Ground
Phase and Ground.
y y
Voltage Measuring Method 1 measure MOV voltage. (measure a voltage between MOV arms)
y
Voltage Measuring Method 2 Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and measure MOV voltage.
Figure 13-34. VD Wiring Diagram
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
289
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) 13.36.1. TYPE1 Sensor It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005. Table 13-11. EVR Pressure Sensor Description
Pin
Function
L
Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from
N
Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+12Vdc±0.5 %) and N(-)
P
Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-) 3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density). 4) “Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage” shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on pressure. 5) EVR has 0.5bar at 20 ℃
Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage
290
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.36.2. TYPE2 Sensor It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005. Table 13-12. EVR Pressure Sensor Description
Pin
Function
L
Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from
N
Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-)
P
Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
5.0 4.5
Output voltage(Vdc)
4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 -0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 13-36. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
291
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact Table 13-13. 52 contact and 69 contact Description
Pin
69 is b Contact when unlocked.
Function
T
69b(Monitored locked)
U
Common(52 and 69)
V
52b(Monitored Trip)
W
52a(Monitored Close)
a
52 common(Auxiliary)
b
52b(Auxiliary)
c
52a(Auxiliary)
13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil Table 13-14. Trip and Close Coil Description
Pin
Function
d
Close and Trip Coil Common
1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line.
e
Close and Trip Coil Common
2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one
f
Close and Trip Coil Common
g
Close Coil
h
Close Coil
j
Close Coil
4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5Ω
m
Trip Coil
5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2Ω
p
Trip Coil
r
Trip Coil
line 3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one line.
292
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
RECLOS SER CONTR ROL EVRC2A A-N6,NT
http p://www.enttecene.co.krr
13..39. Re ecloser Test Kit 1) RTS R 2010 Moodel tests EV VRC2A by Faault Simulatiion. 2) RTS R 2010 cann display Fuull Sequence of Trip timee, Trip currennt, Interval oon LCD screeen and allso can varioously test Callibration Moode, OCR Mo ode, Externaal Mode, Mannual Mode.
F Figure 13-377. Recloser Test Te Kit - RTS S2010 Stan ndard Ratin ngs and Features Tablee 13-15. Stan ndard Ratinggs and Featu ures CLA ASSIFICATION N
RATINGS AND A FEATUR RES
1.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω) Currrent output
4.5Arms×1ch (3ch Paraallel) Accuracy ( 1% or 0.4mA A)
Voltaage output Binaary input Binaary output
7Vrms ×4cch (Burden ov ver 1㏀) Accuracy ( 1% or 0.02V V) BI01~02: DC12~150V D or o Dry contactt(User select) BI03~04: DC12~150V(P D Pulse below 1sec) BO01~04 130mA/3500V, ON Resistance (below 35 Ω)
Timee Accuracy
±5ms
Weigght
6kg(RTS20010), 1.2kg(caable), 6kg AL Case
Dim mensions
325×150×270 (RTS201 10) 521×258×348 (AL CASE)
Conttrol Interface Cable
2M
Operrating Temperrature
-20∼+50℃ AC180~2664 @ Select AC220V
Pow wer input
AC 90~1322 @ Select AC C110V Max. 150W W
ENHA ANCED TEC CHNOLOGY Y
293
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14. MAINTANANCE 14.1. Warning Events In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects. Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/2) EVENT
EVENT TEXT
EXPLANATION
EVR2A ACTION
USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION 1. Check AC Power NFB
AC POWER LO/DEASSERT
External power FAIL
-
2. Check AC Power fuse 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected 1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit CHGBD FAIL
FAIL
-
(Value ≦25V) BATT FAIL
Battery Discharge or No Battery
2. Check Battery charge Voltage (range DC 27 ~ DC 28V) 3. Replace Analog Module
-
1. BATT DISCHG display 2. NO BATTERY display 1. Check AC Power NFB
1) BATTDISCHG
Battery Discharge (15V < Value ≦ 21V)
2. Check AC Power fuse -
3. Check AC supply, ensure AC connector is securely connected 4. Replace Battery charge T.R
SYSTEM
2)
NO Battery
NO BATTERY
(Value < 15V)
SYSPW FAIL
-
1. Check battery NFB 2. Check battery connection
1. SYS ALARM display
1. +12V FAIL display
2. Protection disabled
2. +5 V FAIL display
System power FAIL
3. -12V FAIL display 4. REF1V FAIL display
POWER
5. REF2V FAIL display 1) +12V FAIL
System power
1. SYS ALARM display
1. Check System power connection
+12V FAIL
2. Protection disabled
2. Check System power cable fault
(Value ≦11V, or ≧13V) 2) +5 V FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module
System power
1. SYS ALARM display
1. Check System power connection
+5V FAIL
2. Protection disabled
2. Check System power cable fault
(Value ≦4.6V, or ≧5.4V) 3) -12V FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module
System power
1. SYS ALARM display
1. Check System power connection
-12V FAIL
2. Protection disabled
2. Check System power cable fault
(Value ≦-13V, or ≧-11V)
A/D converter 4)
Reference voltage 1
REF1V FAIL
FAIL
3. Replace UPS Module 1. SYS ALARM display
Replace A/D Converter Module
2. Protection disabled
(Value ≦2.3V, or ≧ 2.7V)
A/D converter 5)
Reference Voltage 2
REF2V FAIL
FAIL
1. SYS ALARM display 2. Protection disabled
(Value≦2.3V,or≧ 2.7V)
294
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
Replace A/D Converter Module
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/2) EVENT POWER
DOWN
MODE
EVENT TEXT POWER DOWN
GAS LOW
EXPLANATION Power down mode
Gas pressure Low
EVR2A ACTION
USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION
SYS ALARM display
No problem
Protection disabled
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
(*. Opteional)
connected 2. Check Control cable fault
(Value < 0.1 Bar)
3. Replace Main Processing Module 4. Replace Recloser.
GAS STATUS
1.Ensure Control cable is securely GAS HIGH
connected
Gas pressure High
-
(Value > 1.5 Bar)
2. Check Control cable fault 3. Replace Relay Module 4. Replace Recloser No problem
SETTING
SYSTEM RESTART
SET CHANGE
Setting Changed
-
RESTART
System restarted
-
No problem
COLD RST
Cold Restarted
-
No problem
P-ROM FAIL
S-ROM FAIL
Parallel EEPROM
SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
1. SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
FAIL Serial EEPROM FAIL
D-RAM FAIL
Data RAM FAIL
S-RAM FAIL
Setting RAM FAIL
2. Change to Default Setting
MEMORY
R-RAM FAIL
RTC NV RAM FAIL
SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
1. SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
2. Set up time & data at
RTC FAIL
RTC Time FAIL
RTC BAT LO
RTC Battery LOW
0 hr., 0 min. and 0 sec. on Jan. 1, 200.
I-VAL FAIL
Initial Value FAIL
SYS ALARM display
Replace RTC Battery
1. SYS ALARM display
1. Execute All Clear Event
2. Store Value Clear
2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module
I-SET FAIL
COMMUNICATION
Ect.
C-BD FAIL
Initial Setting Value FAIL
1. Execute System Restart
2. Change to Default
3. Replace Main Processing Module
Setting
Communication
Communication restart
Replace Communication Module
SYS ALARM display
Replace Main Processing Module
Option Board FAIL
AD BUSY
A/D Conversion BUSY
ORER-ALM
Trip Counter Alarm
WEAR-ALM
1. SYS ALARM display
Main Alarm
Contact
Wear
-
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
1. Check Recloser. 2. Replace Recloser. 1. Check Recloser. 2. Replace Recloser.
295
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT
http://www.entecene.co.kr
14.2. Malfunction Events The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and what they indicate. It also suggests steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was generated. Table 14-2. Malfunction Events EVENT
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
RECOMMENDED ACTION 1 Connection state of control cable 2. control Box inside CN8 connection state check - Table 13-2
Control Cable
- Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
- Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference 3. control Box inside CN6 connection state check
OPERATION FAIL
- Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
Operation Fail
- Figure 13-10 Reference 1.That control switch point of contact check 2. control Box inside FUSE state check Etc..
- Figure 13-31 Reference 3. Replace Relay Module 4. Replace Recloser 1 Connection state of control cable 2. control Box inside CN1 connection state check
Current measure Fail of current &
- Table 13-2 Control Cable
voltage measurement Voltage measure
- Figure 13-8
- Figure 13-9
- Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference 1 Connection state of control cable 2. control Box inside CN2 connection state check - Table 13-2
- Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
- Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference
296
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
View more...
Comments
